1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes true
139 \output_changes false
143 \author 274215730 "scott"
144 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
155 by the \SpecialChar LyX
160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
162 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
163 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
164 Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
197 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
219 What is \SpecialChar LyX
223 \begin_layout Standard
225 is a document preparation system.
226 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
227 scripts, publishable books, business
228 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
229 It is unlike most other
230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
237 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
239 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
255 pt type, left justified, 5
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
265 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
269 \begin_layout Standard
270 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
275 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
279 \begin_layout Standard
284 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
285 's philosophy: most importantly,
286 the format of all of the manuals.
287 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
288 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
294 manual describes that, too.
297 \begin_layout Section
302 \begin_layout Standard
303 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
304 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
306 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
307 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
311 \begin_layout Standard
312 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
313 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
314 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
316 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
317 only a vertical scrollbar.
318 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
319 The first case is large images.
320 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
321 image and use the option
332 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
335 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
336 this doesn't work for equations yet.
339 \begin_layout Standard
340 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
341 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
349 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
356 \begin_layout Section
360 \begin_layout Standard
361 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
363 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
365 Just select the manual you want to read from the
372 \begin_layout Section
373 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
377 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
384 \begin_layout Standard
385 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
386 can be configured via the menu
388 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
392 \begin_inset Index idx
395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
402 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
404 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
405 packages are available.
406 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
408 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
410 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
415 \begin_inset space \space{}
418 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
419 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
421 To force \SpecialChar LyX
422 to re-inspect your system, you should use
424 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
428 \begin_inset Index idx
431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
432 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
438 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
439 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
442 \begin_layout Section
445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
447 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
454 \begin_layout Standard
455 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
456 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 installed, but you will not be
458 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
459 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
460 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
461 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
462 document can always be output as plain text
466 \begin_layout Standard
467 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 or DocBook classes or packages.
469 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
470 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
476 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
479 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
487 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
488 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
495 \begin_inset Index idx
498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
499 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
507 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
514 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \begin_layout Chapter
519 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
523 \begin_layout Section
524 Basic File Operations
525 \begin_inset Index idx
528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
537 \begin_layout Standard
542 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
543 in addition to some more advanced operations:
546 \begin_layout Itemize
568 \begin_layout Itemize
584 arg "buffer-new-template"
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
622 \begin_layout Itemize
636 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
670 arg "buffer-write-as"
676 \begin_layout Itemize
690 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Standard
705 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
706 a few minor differences.
709 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
720 command lists the available templates.
721 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
722 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
723 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
731 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
738 \begin_layout Standard
739 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
771 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
772 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
773 is just that — a big, blank space.
781 \begin_layout Standard
802 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
807 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
810 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
828 will reload the document from disk.
829 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
830 and want to restore it to the last save.
839 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
840 them as your changes.
843 \begin_layout Section
844 Basic Editing Features
845 \begin_inset Index idx
848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
857 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
864 \begin_layout Standard
865 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
866 can perform cut and paste operations
867 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
868 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
869 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
870 editing features and how to access
872 We will start with cut and paste.
875 \begin_layout Standard
876 As you might expect, the
880 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
881 various other editing features.
882 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
886 \begin_layout Itemize
892 \begin_inset Index idx
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
924 \begin_layout Itemize
930 \begin_inset Index idx
933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
962 \begin_layout Itemize
968 \begin_inset Index idx
971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
996 \begin_layout Itemize
1000 \begin_inset space ~
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1010 \begin_inset space ~
1016 \begin_layout Itemize
1020 \begin_inset space ~
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset Index idx
1033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \begin_inset Index idx
1045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1060 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1070 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1076 \begin_layout Standard
1077 The first three are self-explanatory.
1078 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1079 and other programs by
1100 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1101 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1106 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1107 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1108 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1109 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1110 into individual cells.
1114 \begin_inset space ~
1119 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1120 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1124 \begin_layout Standard
1128 \begin_inset space ~
1133 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1135 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1137 \begin_inset space ~
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1150 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1151 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1152 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1158 \begin_inset space \space{}
1161 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1162 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1168 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1178 \begin_inset space ~
1187 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1188 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1190 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1199 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1200 start a new paragraph.
1201 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1202 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1210 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1224 \begin_inset space ~
1227 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1230 paste from the primary selection.
1231 This is normally the currently selected text.
1234 \begin_layout Standard
1237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1261 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1267 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1270 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1284 button to skip the current word.
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1293 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1302 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1304 If the toggle is set, searching for
1305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1316 will not match the word
1317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1331 Match whole words only
1333 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1334 to only find complete words, e.
1335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1364 offers also an advanced
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1376 feature that is described in section
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1383 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1390 \begin_layout Standard
1391 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1392 \begin_inset space \space{}
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1404 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1406 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1411 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1418 \begin_layout Standard
1422 arg "inset-select-all"
1425 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1426 When the cursor is inside an inset
1429 arg "inset-select-all"
1432 selects the content of the inset.
1436 arg "inset-select-all"
1439 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1444 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1447 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1451 \begin_layout Section
1453 \begin_inset Index idx
1456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1463 \begin_inset Index idx
1466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1475 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1482 \begin_layout Standard
1483 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1485 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1491 or the toolbar button
1497 to undo some mistake.
1498 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1503 or the toolbar button
1510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1517 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1521 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1524 \begin_layout Standard
1525 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1534 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1535 This is a consequence of the 100
1536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 step undo limit mentioned above.
1542 \begin_layout Standard
1551 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1553 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1557 \begin_layout Section
1559 \begin_inset Index idx
1562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1571 \begin_layout Standard
1572 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1575 \begin_layout Enumerate
1580 \begin_layout Itemize
1585 once anywhere in the edit window.
1586 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1590 \begin_layout Enumerate
1595 \begin_layout Itemize
1602 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1608 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1609 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1612 \begin_layout Itemize
1613 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1623 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1628 \begin_layout Standard
1629 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1630 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1634 \begin_layout Section
1636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1638 name "sec:Navigating"
1643 \begin_inset Index idx
1646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1655 \begin_layout Standard
1657 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1660 \begin_layout Itemize
1665 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1666 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1672 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1674 \begin_inset space ~
1679 or by the toolbar button
1682 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1691 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1694 and use the same menu to return to them.
1695 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1698 \begin_layout Standard
1702 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1707 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1708 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1715 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1716 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1717 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1718 your last editing position.
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1726 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1730 \begin_layout Subsection
1732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1734 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1739 \begin_inset Index idx
1742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1743 Navigating ! Outline
1749 \begin_inset Index idx
1752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1761 \begin_layout Standard
1762 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1763 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1764 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1766 \begin_inset space ~
1770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1772 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1776 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1777 \begin_inset space ~
1781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1783 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1788 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1793 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1794 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1795 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1796 dialog and to modify the citation.
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1800 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1802 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1803 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1811 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1814 \begin_layout Standard
1815 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1816 you further to control the display.
1821 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1822 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1828 option keeps it in the current view state.
1829 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1833 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1834 \begin_inset space ~
1837 3, the subsections of sections
1838 \begin_inset space ~
1841 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1846 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1851 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1861 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1864 \begin_layout Standard
1871 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1872 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1886 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1887 So, for example, you can move section
1888 \begin_inset space ~
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 2.4 or after section
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1901 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1914 (or the corresponding key bindings
1922 ) you can change the level of sections.
1923 So you can for example make section
1924 \begin_inset space ~
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_layout Subsection
1939 Horizontal Scrolling
1940 \begin_inset Index idx
1943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1944 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1952 \begin_layout Standard
1954 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1960 \begin_inset space \space{}
1964 \begin_inset space ~
1967 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1968 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1969 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1973 \begin_layout Standard
1974 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1978 \begin_layout Itemize
1980 is used on a small tablet computer
1983 \begin_layout Itemize
1984 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1996 \begin_inset space ~
2009 \begin_layout Itemize
2010 Math constructs with long command names
2013 \begin_layout Standard
2014 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2015 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2017 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2018 windows so that table
2019 \begin_inset space ~
2023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2025 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2030 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2032 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2033 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2036 \begin_layout Standard
2037 \begin_inset Float table
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2049 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2053 Horizontal scrolling test.
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset Tabular
2064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2110 \begin_layout Section
2111 Input/Word Completion
2112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2114 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2119 \begin_inset Index idx
2122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Standard
2165 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2167 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2168 is used to propose completions.
2171 \begin_layout Standard
2172 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2175 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2180 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 \begin_inset space ~
2191 \begin_inset space ~
2196 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2200 \begin_inset space ~
2205 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2206 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2216 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2217 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2218 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2219 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2222 \begin_layout Standard
2224 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2225 completions available.
2230 key to accept a proposed completion.
2231 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2232 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2233 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2241 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2242 ing options for text.
2243 The special math option
2247 enables characters to be composed.
2248 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2249 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2252 , you can then input the characters
2253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2264 to a formula to get it.
2265 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2266 of the math toolbar.
2267 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2271 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2272 's installation folder.
2273 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2282 \begin_layout Section
2284 \begin_inset Index idx
2287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2294 \begin_inset Index idx
2297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2326 \begin_inset Index idx
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2360 \begin_layout Standard
2361 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2375 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2378 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2382 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2389 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2396 \begin_layout Standard
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2408 \begin_inset space ~
2429 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2433 \begin_layout Labeling
2434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2438 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2439 LatexCommand nomenclature
2441 description "Tabulator key"
2447 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2449 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2450 \begin_inset space ~
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2456 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2467 , especially section
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "subsec:Lists"
2480 If you are still confused, look in the
2485 \begin_inset Newline newline
2493 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2494 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2498 \begin_layout Labeling
2499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2503 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2504 LatexCommand nomenclature
2506 description "Escape key"
2513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2521 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2524 \begin_layout Labeling
2525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2531 \begin_inset space ~
2535 \begin_inset space ~
2542 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2543 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2547 \begin_layout Standard
2548 There are three modifier keys:
2551 \begin_layout Labeling
2552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2570 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2571 LatexCommand nomenclature
2573 description "Control key"
2577 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2578 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2582 \begin_layout Itemize
2591 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2594 \begin_layout Itemize
2603 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2606 \begin_layout Itemize
2615 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2619 \begin_layout Labeling
2620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2638 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2639 LatexCommand nomenclature
2641 description "Shift key"
2645 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2646 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2649 \begin_layout Labeling
2650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2668 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2669 LatexCommand nomenclature
2671 description "Alt or Meta key"
2675 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2676 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2677 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2683 \begin_inset Newline newline
2686 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2688 menu accelerator keys
2691 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2692 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2696 \begin_layout Standard
2697 For example, the sequence
2698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2704 \begin_inset space ~
2708 \begin_inset space ~
2714 \begin_inset space ~
2722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2741 \begin_inset space ~
2747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2762 manual lists all other things bound to the
2770 \begin_layout Standard
2771 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2773 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2774 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2775 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2776 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2777 The \SpecialChar LyX
2778 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2779 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2780 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2782 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2798 followed by a capital
2805 \begin_layout Chapter
2808 \begin_inset Index idx
2811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2821 \begin_layout Section
2823 \begin_inset Index idx
2826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2835 \begin_layout Subsection
2839 \begin_layout Standard
2840 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2841 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2842 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2843 numbering schemes, and so on.
2844 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2845 and format the title of your document differently.
2848 \begin_layout Standard
2853 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2854 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2855 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2856 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2857 picks one for you by default.
2858 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2861 \begin_layout Subsection
2863 \begin_inset Index idx
2866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2875 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2882 \begin_layout Standard
2883 You can select a class using the
2885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2890 \begin_inset Index idx
2893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2900 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2908 \begin_layout Standard
2909 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2914 \begin_layout Description
2915 Article for basic articles
2918 \begin_layout Description
2919 Report for basic reports
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Book for writing a book
2926 \begin_layout Description
2927 Letter for US-style letters
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2932 only uses if you have installed
2933 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2934 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2935 distributions will include
2937 Here are some of the classes.
2938 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2940 Special Document Classes
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2953 \begin_layout Description
2954 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2958 \begin_layout Description
2959 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2963 \begin_layout Description
2964 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2965 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2966 There are three article layouts available.
2967 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2968 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2969 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2970 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2975 sequential numbering
2976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2979 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2980 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2981 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2982 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 Beamer Layout for presentations
2989 \begin_layout Description
2990 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2991 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2992 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2993 with \SpecialChar LyX
2997 \begin_layout Description
2998 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3001 \begin_layout Description
3003 \begin_inset space ~
3006 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3013 \begin_layout Description
3014 Foils Used to make transparencies
3017 \begin_layout Description
3018 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3019 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3020 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3021 with \SpecialChar LyX
3025 \begin_layout Description
3026 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3027 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3040 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3041 (Is used by this document.)
3044 \begin_layout Description
3045 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3052 \begin_layout Description
3057 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3058 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3060 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 Slides Used to make transparencies
3068 \begin_layout Description
3070 \begin_inset space ~
3073 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3074 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3077 \begin_layout Description
3078 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3081 \begin_layout Standard
3082 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3084 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3086 Special Document Classes
3093 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3094 of the document classes.
3097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3107 \begin_inset Index idx
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3127 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3128 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3130 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3133 \begin_layout Standard
3136 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3141 , are highly specialized.
3143 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3144 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3145 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3146 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3147 by some document class.
3148 There are just too many of them.
3149 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3152 \begin_layout Standard
3153 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3161 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3162 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3163 document class for a new file.
3165 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3168 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3175 manual for information on how to install them.
3176 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3183 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3184 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3185 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3186 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3187 class files to be used for dissertation
3188 s submitted to those universities.
3189 The \SpecialChar LyX
3190 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3192 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3196 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3202 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3205 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3209 name "subsec:Modules"
3214 \begin_inset Index idx
3217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3226 \begin_layout Standard
3227 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3228 chosen document class.
3229 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3230 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3241 \begin_inset Index idx
3244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3255 \begin_layout Standard
3256 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3257 packages or file format converters that are not always
3258 installed by default.
3260 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3261 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3262 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3263 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3265 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3266 file without the missing prerequisites.
3267 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3268 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3271 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3275 \begin_inset Index idx
3278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3279 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3285 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3290 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3293 \begin_layout Standard
3294 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3304 will advise you about these things.
3312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3316 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3321 \begin_inset Index idx
3324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Document ! Local Layout
3333 \begin_layout Standard
3334 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3335 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3336 : They are intended to be used in
3337 a variety of different documents.
3338 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3339 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3340 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3341 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3342 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3344 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3362 manual for information on how to use it.
3365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3369 \begin_layout Standard
3370 Each class has a default set of options.
3371 Here's a quick table describing them:
3374 \begin_layout Standard
3375 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3383 \begin_inset Tabular
3384 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3385 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 \begin_layout Standard
3845 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 You're probably also wondering what
3853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3857 \begin_inset space ~
3861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3865 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3866 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3871 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3876 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3886 headings, there are also
3894 headings, and so on.
3895 We will describe these headings fully in section
3896 \begin_inset space ~
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3902 reference "subsec:Headings"
3909 \begin_layout Subsection
3911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3913 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3918 \begin_inset Index idx
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3928 \begin_inset Index idx
3931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3940 \begin_layout Standard
3941 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3950 \begin_inset space ~
3958 \begin_inset space ~
3963 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3965 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3966 doesn't support special options you want to
3967 use for your document.
3968 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3969 -class and its options, you have to read
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3990 \begin_inset space ~
3995 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3996 You can choose between the following five options:
3999 \begin_layout Labeling
4000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4005 Use default page style of current class.
4008 \begin_layout Labeling
4009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4014 No page numbers or headings.
4017 \begin_layout Labeling
4018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 \begin_layout Labeling
4027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4032 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4033 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4034 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4035 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4044 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4045 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4051 \begin_inset Index idx
4054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 -packages ! fancyhdr
4062 How they are defined is explained in section
4063 \begin_inset space ~
4067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4069 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4077 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4078 \begin_inset space ~
4082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4084 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4091 \begin_layout Subsection
4092 Paper Size and Orientation
4093 \begin_inset Index idx
4096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4097 Document ! Paper size
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4105 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 You can find the following options in the menu
4116 \begin_inset space ~
4123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4139 \begin_layout Labeling
4140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4149 What size paper to print on.
4154 \begin_layout Itemize
4160 \begin_layout Itemize
4166 \begin_layout Itemize
4172 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 US letter, US legal, US executive
4184 \begin_layout Itemize
4190 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Labeling
4198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4203 To choose whether to output as
4214 \begin_layout Labeling
4215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4219 \begin_inset space ~
4224 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4225 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4228 \begin_layout Subsection
4230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4232 name "subsec:Margins"
4237 \begin_inset Index idx
4240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 \begin_inset Index idx
4250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4259 \begin_layout Standard
4260 Paper margins are set in the menu
4262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4266 \begin_inset Index idx
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4278 \begin_layout Standard
4279 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4280 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4281 the paper format and the font size into account.
4284 \begin_layout Subsection
4288 \begin_layout Standard
4289 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4295 That includes the paragraph environments.
4296 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4297 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4298 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4300 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4309 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4311 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4312 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4313 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4316 \begin_layout Section
4317 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4318 \begin_inset Index idx
4321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4322 Paragraph ! Indentation
4330 \begin_layout Subsection
4332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4334 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4341 \begin_layout Standard
4342 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4343 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4346 \begin_layout Standard
4347 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4348 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4349 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4350 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4354 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4360 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4361 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4362 language than English.
4364 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4369 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4370 into \SpecialChar LyX
4372 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4375 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4377 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4378 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4379 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4386 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4387 goes to produce a printable file.
4392 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4394 gives you the ability globally to change
4398 these pre-coded spacings.
4399 We will explain more later.
4402 \begin_layout Subsection
4403 Paragraph Separation
4404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4406 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4411 \begin_inset Index idx
4414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 Paragraph ! Separation
4423 \begin_layout Standard
4431 \begin_inset space ~
4439 \begin_inset space ~
4446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4450 \begin_inset Index idx
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4459 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4462 \begin_layout Subsection
4466 \begin_layout Standard
4467 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset space ~
4477 dialog and toggle the
4480 \begin_inset space ~
4485 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4488 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4492 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4493 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4497 \begin_layout Standard
4498 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4499 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4502 \begin_layout Subsection
4504 \begin_inset Index idx
4507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4508 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4516 \begin_layout Standard
4519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4523 \begin_inset Index idx
4526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4539 \begin_inset space ~
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4549 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4560 -packages ! setspace
4565 installed to use this feature.
4570 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4572 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4574 \begin_inset space ~
4579 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4580 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4583 \begin_layout Section
4584 Paragraph Environments
4585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4587 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4592 \begin_inset Index idx
4595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4596 Paragraph ! Environments
4602 \begin_inset Index idx
4605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4606 Paragraph environments|(
4614 \begin_layout Subsection
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4631 } \SpecialChar ldots
4641 \begin_inset Newline newline
4644 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4646 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4647 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4648 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4657 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4660 \begin_layout Standard
4661 A paragraph environment is simply a
4662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4669 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4670 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4671 scheme, labels, and so on.
4672 Additionally, you can
4673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4680 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4681 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4682 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4683 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4685 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4687 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4690 \begin_layout Standard
4691 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4692 \begin_inset Graphics
4693 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4699 at the left end of the toolbar.
4701 will change the environment of the
4705 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4706 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4707 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4720 create a new paragraph using the
4724 paragraph environment.
4726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4733 because if you are in one of these environments:
4736 \begin_layout Itemize
4742 \begin_layout Itemize
4748 \begin_layout Itemize
4754 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 \begin_layout Itemize
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4772 \begin_layout Itemize
4778 \begin_layout Standard
4780 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4784 , rather than resetting it to
4789 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4790 \begin_inset space ~
4794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4796 reference "sec:Nesting"
4803 \begin_layout Subsection
4807 \begin_layout Standard
4808 The default paragraph environment is
4813 It creates a plain paragraph.
4815 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4816 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4817 this manual) are in the
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4825 You can nest a paragraph using the
4829 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4837 \begin_layout Subsection
4839 \begin_inset Index idx
4842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 \begin_layout Standard
4852 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4853 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4862 for thanks or contact information.
4863 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4864 places all of this on a separate page
4865 along with today's date.
4866 For other types of documents, the title
4867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4874 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4880 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4894 Here's how you use them:
4897 \begin_layout Itemize
4898 Put the title of your document in the
4905 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 Put the author name in the
4913 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4915 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4921 Note that using this environment is optional.
4922 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4923 will automatically insert today's date.
4924 If you don't want a date, use the option
4926 Suppress default date on front page
4930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4931 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4933 \begin_inset space ~
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4942 You can use footnotes to insert
4943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4950 or contact information.
4953 \begin_layout Subsection
4955 \begin_inset Index idx
4958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4967 name "subsec:Headings"
4974 \begin_layout Standard
4975 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4977 takes care of the numbering for you.
4980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4982 \begin_inset Index idx
4985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 Section headings ! Numbered
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4999 \begin_layout Enumerate
5005 \begin_layout Enumerate
5011 \begin_layout Enumerate
5017 \begin_layout Enumerate
5023 \begin_layout Enumerate
5029 \begin_layout Enumerate
5035 \begin_layout Enumerate
5041 \begin_layout Standard
5043 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5044 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5045 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5049 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5050 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5051 You group the book into chapters.
5053 does a similar grouping:
5056 \begin_layout Itemize
5061 is divided into either
5072 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5096 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 \begin_layout Itemize
5120 \begin_layout Itemize
5132 \begin_layout Standard
5133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5141 Not all document types use the
5145 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5150 is the top-level heading.
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5163 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5164 labels it with its number,
5165 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5167 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5181 \begin_inset Index idx
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5193 \begin_layout Standard
5194 The unnumbered section headings have a
5195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 at the end of their name.
5203 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5204 the table of contents, see section
5205 \begin_inset space ~
5209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5219 Changing the Numbering
5220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5222 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5229 \begin_layout Standard
5230 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5231 in the Table of Contents.
5232 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5234 Just as certain classes start with
5248 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5258 This is something you can change.
5261 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5268 \begin_inset Index idx
5271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5280 \begin_inset space ~
5284 \begin_inset space ~
5289 you will see two counters.
5294 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5295 numbers a section heading.
5296 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5301 Short Titles of Headings
5302 \begin_inset Index idx
5305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5306 Section headings ! Short titles
5312 \begin_inset Argument 1
5315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5324 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5331 \begin_layout Standard
5332 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5333 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5334 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5335 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5340 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5341 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5342 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5343 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5348 \begin_inset space ~
5354 This will insert a box labeled
5355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5359 \begin_inset space ~
5363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5366 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5367 This also works for captions inside floats.
5368 There can only be one short title per title.
5371 \begin_layout Standard
5372 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5379 \begin_layout Standard
5380 The following information applies to all section headings:
5383 \begin_layout Itemize
5384 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5387 \begin_layout Itemize
5388 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5391 \begin_layout Itemize
5392 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5395 \begin_layout Itemize
5396 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5399 \begin_layout Subsection
5403 \begin_layout Standard
5405 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5419 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5420 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5421 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5422 the text they contain.
5423 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5431 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5434 \begin_layout Standard
5435 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5444 when you start a new paragraph.
5445 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5449 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5450 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5451 have to change back to the
5455 environment yourself.
5458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_inset Index idx
5470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5481 time for the differences.
5490 are identical except for one difference:
5494 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5503 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5506 \begin_layout Standard
5507 Here's an example of the
5520 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5522 See – no indentation!
5526 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5527 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5528 the other paragraph.
5531 \begin_layout Standard
5532 Here's another example, this time in the
5539 \begin_layout Quotation
5545 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5546 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5547 the first line, then
5551 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5555 you were quoting other text.
5558 \begin_layout Quotation
5559 Here's a new paragraph.
5560 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5561 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5564 \begin_layout Standard
5565 As the examples show,
5569 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5570 They should put quotes in the
5575 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5579 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5584 \begin_inset Index idx
5587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5594 \begin_inset Index idx
5597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5613 \begin_layout Standard
5618 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5624 \begin_inset Newline newline
5627 Which I did not rehearse!
5631 It could be much worse.
5632 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5634 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5635 indented a bit more than the first.
5636 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5642 \begin_inset Newline newline
5645 And make things look fine
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 arg "newline-insert newline"
5658 \begin_layout Standard
5663 does not indent both margins.
5664 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5665 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5668 arg "newline-insert newline"
5674 \begin_layout Subsection
5676 \begin_inset Index idx
5679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5695 \begin_layout Standard
5697 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5707 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5708 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5717 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5718 lets you provide your own label.
5719 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5720 describing some general features of all four of them.
5723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5727 \begin_layout Standard
5728 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5730 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5731 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5740 reset the environment to
5744 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5745 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5746 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5750 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5754 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5761 \begin_layout Standard
5762 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5763 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5764 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5766 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5767 you read all of section
5768 \begin_inset space ~
5772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5774 reference "sec:Nesting"
5781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5807 paragraph environment.
5808 It has the following properties:
5811 \begin_layout Itemize
5812 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5816 \begin_layout Itemize
5818 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5821 \begin_layout Itemize
5822 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 The items can have any length.
5829 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5830 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 environment inside another
5846 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5856 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5861 \begin_inset space ~
5865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5867 reference "sec:Nesting"
5871 for a full explanation of nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Standard
5876 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5885 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5888 \begin_layout Standard
5889 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5890 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5893 \begin_layout Itemize
5894 The label for the first level
5898 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5902 \begin_layout Itemize
5903 The label for the second level is a dash.
5907 \begin_layout Itemize
5908 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5912 \begin_layout Itemize
5913 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 Back out to the third level.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 Back to the second level.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 Back to the outermost level.
5931 \begin_layout Standard
5932 These are the default labels for an
5937 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5942 dialog in the submenu
5947 \begin_inset Index idx
5950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5956 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5961 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5962 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5964 \begin_inset space ~
5968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5970 reference "sec:Nesting"
5977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5979 \begin_inset Index idx
5982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5991 name "sec:Enumerate"
5998 \begin_layout Standard
6003 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6004 It has these properties:
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6008 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6012 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6017 \begin_layout Enumerate
6019 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6022 \begin_layout Enumerate
6027 environment resets the counter to one.
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6044 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6045 Items can have any length.
6048 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6053 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6056 \begin_layout Enumerate
6057 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6070 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6072 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6073 labels the four different levels in an
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 The first level of an
6085 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6089 \begin_layout Enumerate
6090 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6094 \begin_layout Enumerate
6095 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6099 \begin_layout Enumerate
6100 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 Back to the third level
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 Back to the second level.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 Back to the outermost level.
6123 \begin_layout Standard
6124 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6128 environment, see section
6129 \begin_inset space ~
6133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6135 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6140 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 There is more to nesting
6149 environments than we've stated here.
6150 You should read section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "sec:Nesting"
6161 to learn more about nesting.
6164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6166 \begin_inset Index idx
6169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6178 \begin_layout Standard
6179 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6183 list has no fixed label.
6184 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6193 of the first line as the label.
6197 \begin_layout Description
6198 Example: This is an example of the
6205 \begin_layout Standard
6207 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6211 \begin_layout Standard
6213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6220 it is meant that the first usage of the
6224 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6226 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6234 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6240 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6242 \begin_inset space ~
6248 \begin_inset space ~
6252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6254 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6258 for more information.) Here is an example:
6261 \begin_layout Description
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6266 Example: This one shows how to use a
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6281 \begin_layout Description
6282 Usage: You should use the
6286 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6287 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6289 It's not a good idea to use a
6293 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6294 You're better off using
6306 paragraphs into them.
6309 \begin_layout Description
6310 Nesting: You can nest
6314 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6318 \begin_layout Standard
6319 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6320 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6321 them from the first line.
6324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6326 \begin_inset Index idx
6329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6343 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6344 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6348 \begin_layout Standard
6357 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6359 Here are its properties:
6362 \begin_layout Labeling
6363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6365 \begin_inset space ~
6368 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6377 of each line as the item label.
6382 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6383 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6384 space as described above.
6387 \begin_layout Labeling
6388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6389 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6390 uses different margins for the item label and the
6391 body of the item text.
6392 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6393 label width plus a little extra space.
6397 \begin_layout Labeling
6398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6400 \begin_inset space ~
6403 width \SpecialChar LyX
6404 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6405 If the label width is larger, the label
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 into the first line.
6414 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6415 margin of the rest of the item text.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6429 environment has the same left margin.
6430 \begin_inset Newline newline
6433 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6438 \begin_inset space ~
6443 dialog (toolbar button
6446 arg "layout-paragraph"
6453 \begin_inset space ~
6458 determines the default label width.
6459 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6468 multiple times instead.
6469 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6479 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6482 \begin_inset space ~
6487 every time you alter a label in a
6492 \begin_inset Newline newline
6495 The predefined default width is the length of
6496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6510 \begin_layout Standard
6515 list the same way as the
6519 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6525 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6529 \begin_layout Standard
6534 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6535 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6537 \begin_inset space ~
6541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6543 reference "sec:Nesting"
6547 to learn about nesting.
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6551 There is yet another feature of the
6555 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6556 left-justifies the item labels by
6558 You can use additional
6562 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6563 justifies the item label.
6568 are documented in section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6580 Here are some examples:
6583 \begin_layout Labeling
6584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6585 Left The default for
6592 \begin_layout Labeling
6593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6594 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6601 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6620 \begin_layout Subsection
6622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6624 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6629 \begin_inset Index idx
6632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6641 \begin_layout Standard
6642 The features described in this section require that the module
6644 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6646 is loaded in the document settings.
6647 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6653 \begin_inset Index idx
6656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6658 -packages ! enumitem
6666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6667 Custom Enumerate Lists
6668 \begin_inset Index idx
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6672 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6682 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6688 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6689 There you add the command
6692 \begin_layout Standard
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6713 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6714 Code, look at section
6715 \begin_inset space ~
6719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6721 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6734 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6741 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6742 For capital Roman numerals replace
6754 in the command above.
6755 For Arabic numerals use
6763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6770 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6785 \begin_layout Standard
6787 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6795 You can only number 26
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6799 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6808 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6809 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6813 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate
6817 \begin_inset Argument 1
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Enumerate
6847 \begin_inset Argument 1
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6873 \begin_layout Enumerate
6878 \begin_layout Enumerate
6879 \begin_inset Argument 1
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_inset Argument 1
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6937 For this list these commands were used:
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_inset Newline newline
6959 \begin_inset Newline newline
6967 \begin_inset Newline newline
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6984 makes the label emphasized and
6993 \begin_layout Standard
6994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7002 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7003 lists until you change the definition.
7011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7013 \begin_inset Index idx
7016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7025 \begin_layout Standard
7026 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7029 \begin_layout Enumerate
7030 \begin_inset Argument 1
7033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 \begin_inset Note Note
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7056 goes back to default numbering
7064 \begin_layout Enumerate
7068 \begin_layout Standard
7072 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7076 \begin_layout Standard
7077 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7082 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7083 to indicate that it is a resumed
7084 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7085 , but in the output.
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7097 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7109 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7110 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7111 of a normal enumeration.
7112 There, insert the command
7115 \begin_layout Standard
7121 \begin_layout Standard
7126 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7130 \begin_layout Enumerate
7134 \begin_layout Enumerate
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7139 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7142 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 \begin_inset Argument 1
7146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7162 This enumeration starts at 4
7165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7167 \begin_inset Index idx
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7179 \begin_layout Standard
7180 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7182 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7185 \begin_layout Itemize
7189 \begin_layout Itemize
7190 with standard spacing
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7194 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7196 Add there the command
7200 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7203 \begin_layout Itemize
7204 \begin_inset Argument 1
7207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 \begin_layout Itemize
7230 \begin_layout Itemize
7234 \begin_layout Standard
7235 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7242 \begin_inset Index idx
7245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 -packages ! enumitem
7253 For more information see its documentation,
7254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7264 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7266 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7267 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7271 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7274 \begin_layout Enumerate
7275 \begin_inset Argument 1
7278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7286 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7299 \begin_layout Enumerate
7300 with negative indentation
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7304 Further Customization
7305 \begin_inset Index idx
7308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 Lists ! Customization
7317 \begin_layout Standard
7318 You can also change the style of description lists.
7322 \begin_layout Standard
7328 \begin_layout Standard
7329 changes the description label font, the command
7332 \begin_layout Standard
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 sets the list style.
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7343 An example where the command
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7351 itshape, style=nextline
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7358 \begin_layout Description
7360 \begin_inset space ~
7364 \begin_inset Argument 1
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7373 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7375 itshape, style=nextline
7385 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7386 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7390 \begin_layout Description
7392 \begin_inset space ~
7395 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7396 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7397 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7400 \begin_layout Standard
7401 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7407 \begin_inset Index idx
7410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7412 -packages ! enumitem
7418 For more information see its documentation
7419 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7428 \begin_layout Subsection
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7444 \begin_inset space ~
7447 Address: An Overview
7450 \begin_layout Standard
7451 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7452 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7466 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7467 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7468 gags on the document.
7469 In contrast, you can use the
7476 \begin_inset space ~
7481 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7482 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7486 \begin_layout Standard
7487 Of course, you're not limited to using
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7503 \begin_inset space ~
7508 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7509 some European academic papers.
7512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7516 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7528 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7529 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7538 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7539 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7540 Here's an example of each:
7543 \begin_layout Right Address
7545 \begin_inset Newline newline
7549 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 When is it? What is today?
7559 \begin_layout Standard
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7569 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7571 the largest block of text on a single line.
7572 Here's an example of the
7579 \begin_layout Address
7581 \begin_inset Newline newline
7584 Where do I send this
7585 \begin_inset Newline newline
7588 Your post office and country
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7592 As you can see, both
7599 \begin_inset space ~
7604 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7609 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7610 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7616 This makes sense, since
7624 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7625 Thus, you have to use
7632 arg "newline-insert newline"
7637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7638 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7640 \begin_inset space ~
7644 \begin_inset space ~
7649 ) to start a new line in an
7656 \begin_inset space ~
7664 \begin_layout Subsection
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7670 or list of references.
7672 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7677 \begin_inset Index idx
7680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7689 \begin_layout Standard
7694 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7695 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7696 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7697 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7711 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7712 The book document classes ignores the
7716 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7720 in a letter document class.
7723 \begin_layout Standard
7728 environment does several things for you.
7729 First, it puts the centered label
7730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7738 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7740 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7741 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7742 the subsequent text.
7743 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7745 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7750 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7754 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7755 The new paragraph will still be in the
7760 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7761 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 \begin_inset Float figure
7770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7772 \begin_inset Graphics
7773 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7786 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7807 \begin_layout Standard
7808 We would love to demonstrate the
7812 environment, but since this document is in the
7813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7820 class, we can't do this.
7821 We inserted it therefore as figure
7822 \begin_inset space ~
7826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7828 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7833 If you have never heard of an
7834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7841 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7846 \begin_inset Index idx
7849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7858 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7865 \begin_layout Standard
7870 environment is used to list references.
7871 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7872 only use it at the end of the document.
7884 \begin_layout Standard
7885 When you first open a
7889 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7890 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 depending on the document class.
7907 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7908 Each paragraph of the
7912 environment is a bibliography entry.
7917 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7918 Each new paragraph is still in the
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7927 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7929 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7931 handling, have a look at section
7932 \begin_inset space ~
7936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7938 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7945 \begin_layout Subsection
7946 Special Environments
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7951 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7952 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7960 \begin_inset Index idx
7963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7973 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7986 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7988 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7993 key as a fixed whitespace.
7997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8010 \begin_inset space ~
8015 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8033 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8036 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8039 arg "newline-insert newline"
8056 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8057 So, when you finish using the
8062 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8063 Also, you can nest the
8068 environment inside of others.
8071 \begin_layout Standard
8072 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8075 \begin_layout Itemize
8079 arg "newline-insert newline"
8082 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8087 \begin_inset space \space{}
8097 arg "newline-insert newline"
8103 \begin_layout Itemize
8107 arg "newline-insert newline"
8117 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8123 \begin_layout Itemize
8124 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8125 You must put at least one
8129 in any line you want blank.
8130 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8134 \begin_layout Itemize
8135 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8139 since that will insert
8144 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8147 arg "self-insert \""
8153 \begin_layout Standard
8157 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8161 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8165 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8169 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8173 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8174 printf("Hello World!
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8188 This is just the standard
8189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8200 \begin_layout Standard
8206 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8208 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8209 as if you used a typewriter.
8210 \begin_inset Index idx
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8214 Paragraph environments|)
8219 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8222 Program Code Listings
8227 \begin_inset space ~
8235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8239 \begin_inset Index idx
8242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8251 \begin_layout Standard
8256 environment is similar to the
8261 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8262 computer console text.
8267 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8281 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8282 you can have empty lines.
8295 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 have a certain language and a text style
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8301 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8302 and \SpecialChar TeX
8306 \begin_layout Standard
8307 Because of these properties
8311 works like a typewriter.
8315 \begin_layout Verbatim
8319 \begin_layout Verbatim
8322 The following 2 lines are empty:
8325 \begin_layout Verbatim
8329 \begin_layout Verbatim
8333 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8360 \begin_layout Section
8361 Nesting Environments
8362 \begin_inset Index idx
8365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8366 Nesting ! Environments
8372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8381 \begin_layout Subsection
8385 \begin_layout Standard
8387 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8389 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8391 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8393 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8405 \begin_layout Enumerate
8409 \begin_layout Enumerate
8414 \begin_layout Enumerate
8418 \begin_layout Enumerate
8423 \begin_layout Enumerate
8427 \begin_layout Standard
8428 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8429 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8431 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8433 \begin_inset space ~
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8445 \begin_inset space ~
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8454 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8456 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8459 arg "depth-increment"
8465 arg "depth-decrement"
8479 arg "depth-increment"
8485 arg "depth-decrement"
8489 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8490 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8496 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8497 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8498 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8499 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8502 \begin_layout Standard
8503 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8505 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8507 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8510 \begin_layout Subsection
8511 What You Can and Can't Nest
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8515 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8516 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8519 \begin_layout Standard
8520 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8521 than a simple yes or no.
8522 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8526 Completely unnestable
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8534 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8540 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8541 environments have them:
8544 \begin_layout Description
8545 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8546 Can't nest into them.
8550 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8568 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Description
8583 \begin_inset space ~
8586 Nestable You can nest them.
8587 You can nest other things into them.
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Itemize
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Description
8654 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8655 You can't nest anything into them.
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_inset space ~
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Standard
8755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8763 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8773 \begin_inset space ~
8776 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8777 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8778 nested section headings violate this.
8786 \begin_layout Subsection
8787 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8788 \begin_inset Index idx
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8792 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8800 \begin_layout Standard
8801 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8802 affected by nesting anyhow.
8806 \begin_layout Itemize
8810 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Standard
8820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8828 Figures and tables in
8832 are not affected by this.
8837 Have a look at section
8838 \begin_inset space ~
8842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8844 reference "sec:Floats"
8848 for more information about
8855 \begin_layout Standard
8857 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8858 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8862 \begin_layout Standard
8863 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8871 of its own, it behaves just like a
8872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8879 paragraph environment.
8880 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 Here's an example with a table:
8888 \begin_layout Enumerate
8893 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 This is (a) and it's nested.
8898 \begin_layout Standard
8899 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8905 \begin_layout Standard
8907 \begin_inset Tabular
8908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8909 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8995 \begin_layout Standard
8996 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9003 \begin_layout Enumerate
9005 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9009 \begin_layout Enumerate
9013 \begin_layout Standard
9014 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9017 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 This is (a) and it's nested.
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9028 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9034 \begin_layout Standard
9036 \begin_inset Tabular
9037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9038 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9124 \begin_layout Standard
9125 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9131 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9141 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 \begin_layout Standard
9146 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9154 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 This is (a) and it's nested.
9166 \begin_layout Standard
9167 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9175 \begin_inset Tabular
9176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9177 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 \begin_layout Standard
9265 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9271 \begin_layout Enumerate
9273 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9280 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 \begin_layout Standard
9285 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9291 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9292 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9296 \begin_layout Subsection
9297 Usage and General Features
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9302 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9311 is the innermost possible depth.
9312 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9316 level #1 – outermost
9320 \begin_layout Enumerate
9325 \begin_layout Enumerate
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 \begin_layout Itemize
9340 \begin_layout Itemize
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9350 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9351 both of them in the example.
9352 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9362 For example, if we tried to nest another
9367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9374 , we would get errors.
9377 \begin_layout Subsection
9379 \begin_inset Index idx
9382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9391 \begin_layout Standard
9392 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9393 We have several examples of nested environments.
9394 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9399 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9402 \begin_layout Labeling
9403 \labelwidthstring MMM
9404 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #2-a This is level #2.
9416 We created it by using
9419 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9425 arg "depth-increment"
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #3-a This is level #3.
9435 This time, we just enter
9442 arg "depth-increment"
9446 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9450 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9456 arg "depth-increment"
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9468 environment, nested inside of
9469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9477 So, it's at level #4.
9478 We did this by entering
9481 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9487 arg "depth-increment"
9490 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9495 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9511 \begin_layout Standard
9516 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9519 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9525 \begin_layout Labeling
9526 \labelwidthstring MMM
9527 #4-a This is level #4.
9531 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9534 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9539 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9543 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9548 keep nesting things inside
9549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9560 \begin_layout Labeling
9561 \labelwidthstring MMM
9562 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9567 \begin_layout Labeling
9568 \labelwidthstring MMM
9569 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9570 and this is level #6.
9571 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9575 \begin_layout Labeling
9576 \labelwidthstring MMM
9577 #5-b Back to level #5.
9581 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9587 arg "depth-decrement"
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9605 arg "depth-decrement"
9608 , we're back at level #4.
9612 \begin_layout Labeling
9613 \labelwidthstring MMM
9614 #3-b Back to level #3.
9615 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9619 \begin_layout Labeling
9620 \labelwidthstring MMM
9621 #2-b Back to level #2.
9626 \begin_layout Labeling
9627 \labelwidthstring MMM
9628 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9629 After this sentence, we will enter
9633 and change the paragraph environment back to
9640 \begin_layout Standard
9641 We could have also used the
9657 environment in place of the
9662 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9666 Example 2: Inheritance
9669 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9670 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9682 arg "depth-increment"
9686 \begin_inset Newline newline
9689 which, we will change to the
9697 \begin_layout Enumerate
9702 environment, at level #2.
9705 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 Notice how the nested
9710 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9714 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9718 \begin_layout Standard
9719 We ended this example by entering
9724 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9728 and reset the nesting depth by using
9731 arg "depth-decrement"
9737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9738 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9747 \begin_inset Argument 1
9750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9751 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9759 \begin_layout Enumerate
9760 This is level #1, in an
9764 paragraph environment.
9765 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9769 \begin_layout Enumerate
9774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9780 arg "depth-increment"
9784 Now, what happens if we nest an
9788 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9789 label be? An asterisk?
9793 \begin_layout Itemize
9803 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9804 So, its label is a bullet.
9805 (We got here by using
9808 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9814 arg "depth-increment"
9817 , then changing the environment to
9825 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 Here's level #4, produced using
9829 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9835 arg "depth-increment"
9839 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9844 \begin_layout Enumerate
9847 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9852 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9856 , because we are in the
9864 environment (that is, it is an
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9884 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9885 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9889 \begin_layout Enumerate
9890 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9893 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9896 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9899 \begin_layout Enumerate
9903 arg "depth-decrement"
9906 to decrease the depth after the next
9909 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9926 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9930 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9940 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9945 reset the counter for the label.
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9959 arg "depth-decrement"
9962 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9963 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9964 into the twofold-nested
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9973 The same thing happens if we do another
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9988 \begin_layout Standard
9989 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9994 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10005 The number of other
10009 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10016 The same rule applies for the
10020 environment, as well.
10023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10024 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10027 \begin_layout Enumerate
10028 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10029 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10030 the same detail with how we did it.
10039 \begin_layout Standard
10047 arg "depth-increment"
10054 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10055 the example in parentheses someplace.
10056 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10057 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10058 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10062 \begin_layout Enumerate
10067 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10071 \begin_layout Verse
10072 Now we will add verse.
10073 \begin_inset Newline newline
10076 It will get much worse.
10077 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 arg "depth-increment"
10097 \begin_layout Verse
10098 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10102 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10117 \begin_layout Verse
10118 Here comes a table:
10122 \begin_layout Standard
10123 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10129 \begin_layout Standard
10131 \begin_inset Tabular
10132 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10133 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 \begin_layout Verse
10224 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10234 arg "depth-increment"
10240 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10246 \begin_inset Newline newline
10254 arg "depth-decrement"
10261 \begin_layout Enumerate
10266 : level #1) This is another item.
10267 Note that selecting a
10271 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10272 3 times to put the table inside the
10280 \begin_layout Quotation
10281 We're now ending the
10285 list and changing to
10290 We're still at level #1.
10291 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10292 The next set of paragraphs is a
10293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10300 We will nest both the
10307 \begin_inset space ~
10312 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10316 for the letter body.
10320 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10323 to preserve the depth.
10324 Remember that you need to use
10327 arg "newline-insert newline"
10330 to create multiple lines inside the
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10347 \begin_layout Right Address
10349 \begin_inset Newline newline
10352 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10353 \begin_inset Newline newline
10359 \begin_layout Address
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10367 \begin_layout Quotation
10368 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10372 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10373 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10374 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10375 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10376 as soon as possible.
10377 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10380 \begin_layout Quotation
10381 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10382 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10383 with your order, along with payment.
10386 \begin_layout Quotation
10387 We thank you again for your patience.
10390 \begin_layout Address
10392 \begin_inset Newline newline
10399 \begin_layout Quotation
10400 That ends that example!
10403 \begin_layout Standard
10404 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10405 gives you a lot of power with just
10407 We could have easily nested an
10428 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10431 \begin_layout Subsection
10433 \begin_inset Index idx
10436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10437 Nesting ! Separation
10443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10445 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10452 \begin_layout Standard
10453 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10455 For example you need two different enumerations:
10458 \begin_layout Enumerate
10463 \begin_layout Enumerate
10468 \begin_layout Enumerate
10472 \begin_layout Standard
10473 \begin_inset Separator plain
10479 \begin_layout Itemize
10485 \begin_layout Standard
10486 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Enumerate
10504 \begin_layout Standard
10505 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10506 list item and use the menu
10508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10509 Start New Environment
10512 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10513 ) and behind it the new list.
10516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10517 Start New Parent Environment
10519 only appears if the item is nested.
10520 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10526 (red arrow in LyX).
10527 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10528 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10535 arg "paragraph-break"
10542 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10545 \begin_layout Section
10546 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10547 \begin_inset Index idx
10550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10561 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10563 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10564 be broken at the end of a line.
10565 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10569 \begin_layout Subsection
10571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10573 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10578 \begin_inset Index idx
10581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10590 \begin_layout Standard
10591 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10592 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10593 ) not to break the line at
10595 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10598 \begin_layout Quote
10599 Further documentation is given in section
10600 \begin_inset Newline newline
10604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10606 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10630 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10639 A protected space is set with
10641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10642 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10644 \begin_inset space ~
10652 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10658 \begin_layout Subsection
10660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10662 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10667 \begin_inset Index idx
10670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10671 Spacing ! Horizontal
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10683 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10687 The length units are listed in Appendix
10688 \begin_inset space ~
10692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10694 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10705 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10710 \begin_inset Index idx
10713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10714 Spaces ! Inter-word
10722 \begin_layout Standard
10723 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10724 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10725 at the ends of sentences.
10726 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10727 automatically takes care about this.
10728 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10729 followed by a period; see section
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10736 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10741 To insert a normal space, select
10743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10744 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10746 \begin_inset space ~
10754 arg "space-insert normal"
10760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10764 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10769 \begin_inset Index idx
10772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10781 \begin_layout Standard
10783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10790 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10800 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10801 inside abbreviations:
10804 \begin_layout Quote
10806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10810 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10814 or between values and units.
10815 Compare for example this:
10816 \begin_inset Newline newline
10820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10824 \begin_inset Newline newline
10827 10 kg (normal space
10830 \begin_layout Standard
10831 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10834 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10836 \begin_inset space ~
10844 arg "space-insert thin"
10850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 You can also insert the following space types:
10858 \begin_layout Description
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10864 \begin_inset space ~
10867 space A line with a
10868 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10872 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10876 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10879 negative thin space between the arrows.
10882 \begin_layout Description
10884 \begin_inset space ~
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10891 space A line with a
10892 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10896 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10903 negative medium space between the arrows.
10906 \begin_layout Description
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10915 space A line with a
10916 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10920 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10927 negative thick space between the arrows.
10930 \begin_layout Description
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10940 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10944 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10952 \begin_inset space ~
10956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10959 em) space between the arrows.
10962 \begin_layout Description
10964 \begin_inset space ~
10968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10976 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10980 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 em) space between the arrows.
10994 \begin_layout Description
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11008 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11016 \begin_inset space ~
11020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11023 em) space between the arrows.
11026 \begin_layout Description
11028 \begin_inset space ~
11032 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11036 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 cm space between the arrows.
11051 \begin_layout Standard
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11059 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11063 lists the different space sizes.
11066 \begin_layout Standard
11067 \begin_inset Float table
11072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11073 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11078 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11082 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11092 \begin_inset Tabular
11093 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11094 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11212 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11371 \begin_inset Index idx
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 \begin_layout Standard
11384 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11385 feature for adding extra space
11386 in a uniform fashion.
11387 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11388 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11389 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11390 equally between themselves.
11393 \begin_layout Standard
11394 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11397 \begin_layout Quote
11399 This is on the left side
11400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11403 This is on the right
11406 \begin_layout Quote
11409 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11413 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11419 \begin_layout Quote
11422 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_layout Standard
11437 That was an example in the
11443 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11454 is one in a standard paragraph.
11455 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11459 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11462 \begin_layout Standard
11463 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11466 \begin_inset space ~
11471 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11474 \begin_layout Standard
11476 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11480 \begin_inset space ~
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11488 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11492 \begin_inset space ~
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_layout Standard
11524 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11528 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11540 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11555 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11559 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11561 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11562 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11566 option in the space dialog.
11574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11578 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11583 \begin_inset Index idx
11586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11595 \begin_layout Standard
11596 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11597 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11600 \begin_layout Standard
11601 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11604 What is correct English?:
11605 \begin_inset Newline newline
11609 \begin_inset Newline newline
11613 \begin_inset space ~
11616 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11617 \begin_inset Newline newline
11621 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11653 \begin_layout Standard
11655 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11660 \begin_inset space ~
11664 \begin_inset space ~
11668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11672 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11675 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11679 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11696 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11705 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11706 That is why it is named
11707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11715 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11716 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11720 \begin_layout Subsection
11722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11724 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11729 \begin_inset Index idx
11732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11741 \begin_layout Standard
11742 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11747 \begin_inset space ~
11753 There you find the following sizes:
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11769 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11770 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11775 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11778 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11780 \begin_inset space ~
11786 \begin_inset Index idx
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11790 Document ! Settings
11795 for the paragraph separation.
11796 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11807 \begin_layout Standard
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11822 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11823 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11828 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11829 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11838 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 s are described in section
11848 \begin_inset space ~
11852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11854 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11863 If there are several
11867 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11868 You can therefore use
11872 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11880 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11881 \begin_inset space ~
11885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11887 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11894 \begin_layout Standard
11895 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11905 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11906 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11918 \begin_layout Subsection
11919 Paragraph Alignment
11920 \begin_inset Index idx
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11924 Paragraph ! Alignment
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11933 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11938 dialog (toolbar button
11941 arg "layout-paragraph"
11945 There are five possibilities:
11948 \begin_layout Itemize
11956 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11962 \begin_layout Itemize
11970 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12018 \begin_layout Standard
12019 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12020 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12021 the left and right margins.
12022 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12025 \begin_layout Standard
12027 This paragraph is right aligned,
12030 \begin_layout Standard
12032 this one is centered,
12035 \begin_layout Standard
12037 this one is left aligned.
12040 \begin_layout Subsection
12042 \begin_inset Index idx
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12046 Page breaks ! Forced
12052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12054 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12062 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12063 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12064 force a page break where you want one.
12065 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12066 is good at page breaking.
12067 Only if you use a lot of
12071 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12072 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12075 \begin_layout Standard
12076 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12077 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12081 have to change the page breaking.
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12087 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12090 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12092 \begin_inset space ~
12098 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12108 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12110 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12111 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12116 at the top of a page.
12117 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12119 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12120 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12121 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12125 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12129 to learn more about
12136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12140 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12145 \begin_inset Index idx
12148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12149 Page breaks ! Clear
12157 \begin_layout Standard
12158 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12159 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12160 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12161 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12162 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12165 \begin_layout Standard
12166 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12169 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12171 \begin_inset space ~
12177 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12186 \begin_inset space ~
12191 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12192 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12195 \begin_layout Subsection
12197 \begin_inset Index idx
12200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12209 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12216 \begin_layout Standard
12217 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12219 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12222 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12228 \begin_inset space ~
12236 arg "newline-insert newline"
12240 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12243 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 \begin_inset space ~
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12257 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12260 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12262 This is useful to avoid
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12273 \begin_layout Standard
12274 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12275 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12277 very good at line breaking.
12278 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12279 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12280 \begin_inset space ~
12284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12286 reference "sec:Quote"
12291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12293 reference "sec:Verse"
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12307 \begin_layout Subsection
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12311 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12316 \begin_inset Index idx
12319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 \begin_layout Standard
12330 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12341 \begin_layout Standard
12345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12348 \begin_inset space ~
12353 you can insert horizontal lines.
12354 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12355 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12356 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12359 \begin_layout Standard
12361 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12372 \begin_layout Section
12373 Characters and Symbols
12376 \begin_layout Standard
12377 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12378 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12379 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12387 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12391 for information on how this is done.
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12400 dialog via the menu
12402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12403 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12409 \begin_layout Standard
12410 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12418 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12419 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12421 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12429 \begin_layout Section
12430 Fonts and Text Styles
12431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12433 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12440 \begin_layout Subsection
12442 \begin_inset Index idx
12445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12455 There are two types of fonts:
12458 \begin_layout Description
12460 \begin_inset space ~
12464 \begin_inset Index idx
12467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12473 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12478 characters) in the font.
12479 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12480 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12481 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12482 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12483 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12484 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12485 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12486 \begin_inset Newline newline
12489 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12490 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12491 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12492 sizes than at small ones.
12493 \begin_inset Newline newline
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12515 \begin_layout Description
12517 \begin_inset space ~
12521 \begin_inset Index idx
12524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12530 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12531 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12532 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12533 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12534 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12535 image manipulation program.
12536 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12537 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12538 \begin_inset space ~
12541 pixels high up to 34
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12545 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12546 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12547 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12549 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12550 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12551 \begin_inset Newline newline
12554 Bitmap fonts are named
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12562 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12565 \begin_layout Standard
12566 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12567 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12568 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12569 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12570 use scalable fonts.
12573 \begin_layout Standard
12574 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12577 \begin_layout Standard
12578 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12579 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12580 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12581 font to emphasize text, you use an
12582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12590 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12592 In \SpecialChar LyX
12593 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12597 \begin_layout Subsection
12600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12602 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12609 \begin_layout Standard
12610 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12611 used its own fonts.
12612 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12613 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12616 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12618 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12619 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12620 to a word processor.
12621 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12622 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12623 files are very portable across
12624 different machines.
12625 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12626 has increased a lot
12627 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12630 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12632 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12638 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12643 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 code in the document
12645 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12648 \begin_layout Standard
12649 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 engines that are also able directly
12651 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12653 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12655 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12657 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12658 that is installed on your system.
12659 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12662 \begin_layout Standard
12663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12671 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12672 es; so you might have to experiment.
12680 \begin_layout Subsection
12681 Document Font and Font size
12682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12684 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12689 \begin_inset Index idx
12692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 \begin_inset Index idx
12702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 \begin_layout Standard
12712 You can set the document fonts in the
12714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12718 \begin_inset Index idx
12721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 Document ! Settings
12732 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12733 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12736 \begin_inset space ~
12745 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12750 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12753 \begin_layout Standard
12758 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12759 This requires that you use
12771 as the output format, i.
12772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12776 \begin_inset space \space{}
12779 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12780 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12781 installed (see section
12782 \begin_inset space ~
12786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12788 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12793 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12795 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12796 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12798 \begin_inset space ~
12801 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12802 cannot determine the family.
12803 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12804 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12807 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12810 \begin_layout Standard
12811 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12812 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12817 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12823 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12824 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12851 European Computer Modern
12854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12861 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12864 \begin_layout Standard
12873 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12874 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12882 \begin_inset space ~
12887 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12893 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12894 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12897 \begin_layout Itemize
12901 \begin_inset space ~
12906 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12924 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12925 community in order to replace
12929 as the default font.
12930 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12931 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12948 One difference is improved kerning.
12956 \begin_layout Itemize
12960 \begin_inset space ~
12964 \begin_inset space ~
12969 fonts in (the rare) case that
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12977 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12992 Virtual means that it
12993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13004 -glyphs from other fonts.
13005 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13033 \begin_inset Index idx
13036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 -packages ! aeguill
13043 with the document preamble line
13044 \begin_inset Newline newline
13051 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13052 \begin_inset Newline newline
13057 will fix the guillemet problem.
13062 and that accented characters are not
13066 glyph, but built of
13070 characters, the accent and the letter.
13071 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13077 If you search for example for the French word
13078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13085 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 and not for the glyph
13095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13099 \begin_inset space ~
13103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13109 \begin_layout Itemize
13110 If you do not like the look of
13118 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13139 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13143 serif and typewriter fonts,
13147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13148 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13155 \begin_inset space ~
13164 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13169 \begin_inset space \space{}
13177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13181 \begin_inset space \space{}
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13205 but you can also select your own.
13206 \begin_inset Newline newline
13209 The differences between roman,
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13221 fonts are explained in section
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13228 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13233 \begin_inset Newline newline
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13244 was originally designed for newspapers.
13245 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13246 into the small newspaper columns.
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13258 \begin_layout Standard
13259 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13272 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13277 depends on the class you are using.
13278 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13281 \begin_layout Standard
13282 Note that the font size is the
13287 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13288 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13289 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13290 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13299 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13306 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13313 \begin_layout Standard
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13322 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13327 serif or typewriter.
13332 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13342 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13350 LaTeX font encoding
13352 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13353 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13359 \begin_inset Index idx
13362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13364 -packages ! fontenc
13370 \begin_inset space ~
13374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13376 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13381 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13382 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13390 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13392 Use Old Style Figures
13396 Use True Small Caps
13399 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13402 Use Old Style Figures
13404 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13406 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13414 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13418 Use True Small Caps
13420 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13421 of scaled capitals.
13422 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13423 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13426 \begin_layout Standard
13431 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13432 a font to display the script characters.
13436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13443 \begin_inset Index idx
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13453 So this has no effect for the document language
13467 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13471 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13479 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13484 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13485 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13487 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13492 dialog, see section
13493 \begin_inset space ~
13497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13499 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13511 \begin_layout Subsection
13515 \begin_layout Standard
13516 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13517 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13519 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13520 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13521 choose a math font in the dialog
13523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13527 \begin_inset Index idx
13530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13531 Document ! Settings
13537 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13538 automatically selects a math font.
13539 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13549 \begin_inset space ~
13555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13560 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13561 document font is available.
13564 \begin_layout Standard
13565 Note that the math font will not be used for
13569 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13575 or by the insertion of the command
13582 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13583 \begin_inset space ~
13587 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13588 while the math characters do not.
13590 \begin_inset space ~
13593 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13609 in the document font settings.
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13614 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13615 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13616 font (in most cases
13617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13623 \begin_inset space ~
13629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13632 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13633 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13641 \begin_inset space ~
13647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13653 \begin_layout Subsection
13654 Using Different Character Styles
13655 \begin_inset Index idx
13658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13665 \begin_inset Index idx
13668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13678 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13679 automatically changes the character style for certain
13680 paragraph environments.
13682 supports two character styles,
13691 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13695 \begin_layout Standard
13700 style, do one of the following:
13703 \begin_layout Itemize
13704 click on the toolbar button
13713 \begin_layout Itemize
13714 use the key binding
13723 \begin_layout Standard
13724 These commands are all toggles.
13729 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 One typically uses the
13737 style for proper names.
13739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13746 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13754 \begin_layout Standard
13755 A more widely used character style is the
13760 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13767 \begin_layout Itemize
13768 clicking on the toolbar button
13777 \begin_layout Itemize
13778 using the keybindings
13787 \begin_layout Standard
13792 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13794 use a different font.
13797 \begin_layout Standard
13798 We've been using the
13802 style all over the place in this document.
13803 Here's one more example:
13806 \begin_layout Quotation
13809 Do not overuse character styles!
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13813 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13814 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13815 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13816 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13820 \begin_layout Standard
13821 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13829 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13834 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13840 arg "dialog-show character"
13846 \begin_layout Subsection
13847 Fine-Tuning with the
13852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13854 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13859 \begin_inset Index idx
13862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13872 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13874 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13875 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13876 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13877 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13878 from ordinary dialog.
13881 \begin_layout Standard
13882 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13883 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13884 \begin_inset Newline newline
13887 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13888 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13891 \begin_layout Standard
13892 To use custom character styles, open the
13894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13896 \begin_inset space ~
13899 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13902 dialog or press the toolbar button
13905 arg "dialog-show character"
13909 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13910 font property that you can choose.
13911 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13914 \begin_inset space ~
13919 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13924 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13925 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13926 environments all at once.
13929 \begin_layout Standard
13930 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13933 \begin_inset space ~
13945 \begin_layout Labeling
13946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13960 The possible options are:
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13970 This is the Roman font family.
13971 Normally a serif font.
13972 It's also the default family.
13982 \begin_layout Labeling
13983 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13994 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14014 This is the Typewriter font family.
14020 arg "font-typewriter"
14029 \begin_layout Labeling
14030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14035 This corresponds to the print weight.
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This is the Medium font series.
14047 It's also the default series.
14050 \begin_layout Labeling
14051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14058 This is the Bold font series.
14071 \begin_layout Labeling
14072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14077 As the name implies.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 This is the Upright font shape.
14089 It's also the default shape.
14092 \begin_layout Labeling
14093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14107 s the Italic font shape
14113 \begin_layout Labeling
14114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 This is the Slanted font shape
14123 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14124 , this is different from italic).
14127 \begin_layout Labeling
14128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 \begin_inset space ~
14139 This is the Small caps font shape
14146 \begin_layout Labeling
14147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14152 Alters the text color.
14153 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14162 , which means that the document default color set in
14164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14165 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14171 \begin_inset space ~
14176 is used, you can choose between
14253 \begin_inset Index idx
14256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14265 \begin_layout Labeling
14266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14271 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14272 the language of the document.
14273 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14274 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14276 \begin_inset Newline newline
14279 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14281 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14282 When using the spell checking (see section
14283 \begin_inset space ~
14287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14289 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14293 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14296 \begin_layout Labeling
14297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14302 Alters the size of the font.
14303 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14304 proportional to the document font size.
14305 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14306 the details, but a general description of what
14312 \begin_layout Labeling
14313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 arg "font-size tiny"
14340 \begin_layout Labeling
14341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14368 \begin_layout Labeling
14369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14390 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14396 \begin_layout Labeling
14397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14418 arg "font-size small"
14424 \begin_layout Labeling
14425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 It's also the default size.
14443 arg "font-size normal"
14449 \begin_layout Labeling
14450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14471 arg "font-size large"
14477 \begin_layout Labeling
14478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14499 arg "font-size larger"
14505 \begin_layout Labeling
14506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size largest"
14533 \begin_layout Labeling
14534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14555 arg "font-size huge"
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14583 arg "font-size giant"
14589 \begin_layout Labeling
14590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14595 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 arg "font-size increase"
14621 \begin_layout Labeling
14622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14627 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 arg "font-size decrease"
14654 \begin_layout Standard
14659 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14660 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14662 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14663 — use those instead.
14664 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14667 \begin_layout Labeling
14668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14673 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 This is text with emphasize on
14689 This might seem like the same as
14693 , but it is actually a bit different.
14699 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14701 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14704 \begin_layout Labeling
14705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14712 This is text with Underbar on.
14718 arg "font-underline"
14724 \begin_inset Newline newline
14729 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14730 when you could not change fonts.
14731 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14732 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14733 because some people
14737 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14740 \begin_layout Labeling
14741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14752 This is text with Double underbar on.
14758 arg "font-underunderline"
14762 \begin_inset Newline newline
14765 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14766 about double underbar.
14769 \begin_layout Labeling
14770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14774 \begin_inset space ~
14781 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14787 arg "font-underwave"
14791 \begin_inset Newline newline
14794 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14795 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14798 \begin_layout Labeling
14799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14806 This is text with Strikeout on.
14812 arg "font-strikeout"
14816 \begin_inset Newline newline
14819 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14820 changed in the meantime.
14823 \begin_layout Labeling
14824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14831 This is text with Noun on.
14838 , this is a logical attribute.
14839 Normally it's equivalent to
14842 \begin_inset space ~
14851 \begin_layout Standard
14852 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14853 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14857 \begin_inset space ~
14860 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14866 arg "dialog-show character"
14869 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14870 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14873 arg "textstyle-apply"
14877 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14881 \begin_layout Standard
14882 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14889 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14890 (suppose you just set the shape to
14891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14909 \begin_inset space ~
14921 \begin_layout Standard
14922 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14930 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_layout Itemize
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14955 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 \begin_inset Newline newline
14977 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14991 \begin_inset Note Note
14994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14995 For more on phantoms see section
14996 \begin_inset space ~
15000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15002 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15012 \begin_inset Newline newline
15018 \begin_layout Itemize
15023 fonts use characters with serifs.
15024 These are the small
15025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15032 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15033 The following example shows the difference:
15034 \begin_inset Newline newline
15038 \begin_inset Newline newline
15043 text without serifs
15046 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15050 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15057 \begin_layout Itemize
15062 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15063 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15064 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15067 \begin_layout Standard
15068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15075 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15076 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15079 \begin_inset space ~
15084 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15085 the property to be removed.
15086 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15087 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15088 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15107 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15115 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15119 \begin_inset space ~
15124 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15135 If you, for example, set
15136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15154 \begin_inset space ~
15159 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15168 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15171 \begin_layout Standard
15172 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15173 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15176 \begin_layout Section
15177 Printing and Previewing
15180 \begin_layout Subsection
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15185 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15186 using \SpecialChar LyX
15187 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15188 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15189 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15190 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15192 Additional Features
15197 \begin_layout Standard
15199 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15202 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15203 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15204 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15207 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15208 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15209 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15210 to turn your writing into printable output.
15211 This happens in two stages:
15214 \begin_layout Enumerate
15215 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15216 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 a file with the extension,
15219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15233 \begin_layout Enumerate
15234 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15235 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15236 to use the commands in the
15240 file to produce printable output.
15243 \begin_layout Subsection
15244 Output file formats
15245 \begin_inset Index idx
15248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15257 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15265 Simple text (ASCII)
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15270 File formats ! ASCII
15278 \begin_layout Standard
15279 This file type has the extension
15280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15292 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15296 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 \begin_layout Standard
15304 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15306 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15307 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15309 \begin_inset space ~
15315 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15316 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15317 bibliography (section
15318 \begin_inset space ~
15322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15324 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15329 If your document includes such material, use
15331 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15332 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15338 \begin_inset space ~
15342 \begin_inset space ~
15350 \begin_inset space ~
15354 \begin_inset space ~
15360 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15361 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15367 \begin_inset Index idx
15370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15371 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15380 \begin_layout Standard
15381 This file type has the extension
15382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15393 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15396 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 -Errors or to process it manually
15399 with console commands.
15400 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15401 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15402 's temporary directory whenever you
15403 view or export your document.
15406 \begin_layout Standard
15407 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 -file using the menu
15410 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15411 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15415 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15416 export variants are explained in section
15417 \begin_inset space ~
15421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15423 reference "subsec:Export"
15430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15432 \begin_inset Index idx
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 \begin_layout Standard
15445 This file type has the extension
15446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15467 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15468 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15472 \begin_layout Standard
15473 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15474 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15475 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15476 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15477 when you view the DVI.
15478 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15484 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15485 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15490 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15499 The latter option uses the program
15501 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15507 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15510 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15511 font access (see section
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15518 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15523 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15524 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15531 \begin_inset Index idx
15534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15535 File formats ! PostScript
15543 \begin_layout Standard
15544 This file type has the extension
15545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15557 PostScript was developed by the company
15561 as a printer language.
15562 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15564 PostScript can be seen as a
15565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 programming language
15569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15577 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15584 \begin_inset Index idx
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15589 -packages ! pstricks
15599 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15602 \begin_layout Standard
15603 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 Encapsulated PostScript
15608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15611 (EPS, file extension
15612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15624 As \SpecialChar LyX
15625 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15626 convert them in the background to EPS.
15627 If, for example, you have 50
15628 \begin_inset space ~
15631 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15633 \begin_inset space ~
15636 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15637 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15639 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15640 EPS to avoid this problem.
15643 \begin_layout Standard
15644 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15646 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15647 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15653 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15655 \begin_inset Index idx
15658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15665 \begin_inset Index idx
15668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 \begin_layout Standard
15678 This file type has the extension
15679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15695 Portable Document Format
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 was derived from PostScript.
15704 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15713 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15714 looks exactly the same.
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15722 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15726 (JPG, file extension
15727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15754 Portable Network Graphics
15755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15758 (PNG, file extension
15759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15771 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15772 converts them in the
15773 background to one of these formats.
15774 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15775 will slow down your workflow.
15776 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15779 \begin_layout Standard
15780 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15782 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15788 \begin_layout Description
15790 \begin_inset space ~
15793 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15797 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15800 \begin_layout Description
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15809 ) This uses the program
15811 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15814 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15817 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15820 is a new engine, derived from
15824 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15825 access (see section
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15832 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15837 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15838 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15843 \begin_layout Description
15845 \begin_inset space ~
15852 ) This uses the program
15857 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15863 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15864 font access (see section
15865 \begin_inset space ~
15869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15871 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15876 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15877 vertically written Japanese.
15880 \begin_layout Description
15882 \begin_inset space ~
15885 (cropped) This is the same as
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15893 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15894 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15895 to generate good-looking
15896 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15899 \begin_layout Description
15901 \begin_inset space ~
15904 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15908 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15912 \begin_layout Description
15914 \begin_inset space ~
15917 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15921 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15922 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15926 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15927 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15934 \begin_inset space ~
15943 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15944 works without problems.
15945 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15946 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15950 \begin_inset space ~
15958 \begin_inset space ~
15963 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15973 \begin_inset Index idx
15976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15977 FileFormats ! XHTML
15983 \begin_inset Index idx
15986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15995 \begin_layout Standard
15996 This file type has the extension
15997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16009 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16010 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16011 When \SpecialChar LyX
16012 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16013 suitable for the purpose.
16014 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16017 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16020 between different formats, which are described in section
16022 Math Output in XHTML
16027 \begin_inset space ~
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16036 XHTML output remains
16037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16044 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16045 features are supported yet.
16049 and the World Wide Web
16053 Additional Features
16055 manual, for more information.
16058 \begin_layout Standard
16059 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16061 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16062 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16068 \begin_layout Subsection
16070 \begin_inset Index idx
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16084 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16093 or use the toolbar button
16100 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16101 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16102 \begin_inset space ~
16106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16108 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16112 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16114 \begin_inset space ~
16118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16120 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16125 Further output formats can be selected via
16127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16128 View (Other Formats)
16130 or the toolbar button
16139 \begin_layout Standard
16140 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16141 viewer window using the menu
16143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Update (Other Formats)
16154 \begin_layout Standard
16155 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16158 To have a real output, export your document.
16161 \begin_layout Section
16162 A few Words about Typography
16163 \begin_inset Index idx
16166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 \begin_layout Subsection
16176 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16177 \begin_inset Index idx
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16187 \begin_inset Index idx
16190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 \begin_layout Standard
16200 In \SpecialChar LyX
16202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 character comes in four lengths: the
16225 , and the minus sign:
16226 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16232 \begin_layout Standard
16233 \begin_inset Tabular
16234 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16235 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16236 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16268 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16308 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16335 \begin_inset space ~
16338 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16345 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16372 \begin_inset space ~
16375 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16430 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16436 \begin_layout Standard
16437 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 character multiple times in a row.
16450 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16451 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_layout Standard
16485 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16486 math mode and has a length of its own.
16487 Here are some examples:
16490 \begin_layout Enumerate
16491 line- and page-breaks
16492 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16502 \begin_layout Enumerate
16504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16514 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 Oh — there's a dash.
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16531 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16541 \begin_layout Subsection
16543 \begin_inset Index idx
16546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16555 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16562 \begin_layout Standard
16563 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16564 but automatically in the output.
16565 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16571 \begin_inset Index idx
16574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16581 following the rules of the document language.
16584 \begin_layout Standard
16586 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16590 font and with unusual constructs, like
16591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16599 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16600 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16601 This is done with the menu
16603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16604 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16606 \begin_inset space ~
16612 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16614 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16618 \begin_layout Standard
16619 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16620 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16631 would then see the hyphen
16632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16639 as a hyphenation possibility.
16640 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16641 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16642 as described in section
16644 Prevent Hyphenation
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16657 \begin_layout Subsection
16659 \begin_inset Index idx
16662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16672 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16675 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16682 \begin_layout Standard
16683 When \SpecialChar LyX
16684 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16685 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16687 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16693 appropriate amount of space.
16694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16697 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16699 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16700 gets after another word.
16703 \begin_layout Standard
16704 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16705 not work in all cases.
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16718 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16719 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16722 \begin_layout Standard
16723 Here are some examples of
16727 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16730 \begin_layout Itemize
16735 \begin_layout Itemize
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16741 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16744 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16750 this is too much space!
16753 \begin_layout Itemize
16758 \begin_layout Standard
16759 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16762 \begin_layout Standard
16763 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16766 \begin_layout Enumerate
16770 \begin_inset space ~
16775 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16782 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16787 \begin_inset Index idx
16790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16791 Spaces ! inter-word
16799 \begin_layout Enumerate
16803 \begin_inset space ~
16808 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16809 \begin_inset space ~
16813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16815 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16820 \begin_inset Index idx
16823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16832 \begin_layout Enumerate
16836 \begin_inset space ~
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16853 \begin_inset space ~
16858 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16859 This function is also bound to
16862 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16868 \begin_layout Standard
16869 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16872 \begin_layout Itemize
16874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16878 \begin_inset space \space{}
16881 this is too much space!
16884 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16891 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16893 will take care of this.
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16897 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16901 \begin_inset space ~
16907 feature described in the section
16909 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16914 Additional Features
16919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16921 \begin_inset Index idx
16924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16925 Typography ! Quotes
16931 \begin_inset Index idx
16934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16965 \begin_layout Standard
16967 usually sets quotes correctly.
16968 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16969 and use a closing quote at the end.
16971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16979 The keyboard character,
16983 , generates this automatically.
16986 \begin_layout Standard
16987 You can specify what character the
16991 key produces using the submenu
16997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17001 \begin_inset Index idx
17004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17005 Document ! Settings
17015 There are six choices:
17018 \begin_layout Labeling
17019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 \begin_layout Labeling
17043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17046 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17055 Use quotes like ”this”
17058 \begin_layout Labeling
17059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17062 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17066 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17072 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17076 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17082 \begin_layout Labeling
17083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17086 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17090 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17096 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17100 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17106 \begin_layout Labeling
17107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17110 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17120 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17124 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17130 \begin_layout Labeling
17131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17134 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17138 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17144 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17148 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17154 \begin_layout Standard
17155 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17158 arg "quote-insert single"
17164 \begin_layout Subsection
17166 \begin_inset Index idx
17169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17170 Typography ! Ligatures
17176 \begin_inset Index idx
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17210 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17218 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17219 print them as single characters.
17220 These groups are known as
17225 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17226 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17228 Here are the standard ligatures:
17231 \begin_layout Itemize
17235 \begin_layout Itemize
17239 \begin_layout Itemize
17243 \begin_layout Itemize
17247 \begin_layout Itemize
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17255 \begin_layout Standard
17256 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17257 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17265 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 To break a ligature, use
17283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17284 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17286 \begin_inset space ~
17293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17304 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17321 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17329 \begin_layout Subsection
17331 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17333 \begin_inset Index idx
17336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17346 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17353 \begin_layout Standard
17356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17357 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17361 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17364 \begin_layout Description
17366 The name of the game.
17369 \begin_layout Description
17371 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17375 \begin_layout Description
17377 The \SpecialChar TeX
17378 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17382 \begin_layout Description
17383 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17384 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17388 \begin_layout Standard
17389 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17395 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17403 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17404 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17405 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17406 converges to the number
17407 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17410 : The actual version is
17411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17419 , the previous one was
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17431 \begin_layout Subsection
17433 \begin_inset Index idx
17436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17445 \begin_layout Standard
17446 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17447 space between two words.
17448 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17458 for units use the menu
17460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17461 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17463 \begin_inset space ~
17471 arg "space-insert thin"
17477 \begin_layout Standard
17478 Here is an example to show the differences:
17481 \begin_layout Standard
17482 \begin_inset Tabular
17483 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17484 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17485 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17493 \begin_inset space ~
17497 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17509 space between number and unit
17516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17525 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17537 half space between number and unit
17550 \begin_layout Subsection
17552 \begin_inset Index idx
17555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17564 \begin_layout Standard
17565 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17567 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17568 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17569 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17570 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17571 These bits of text became known as
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17583 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17584 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17585 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17586 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17587 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17588 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17589 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17590 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17591 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17592 \begin_inset Newline newline
17600 \begin_inset Newline newline
17608 \begin_inset Newline newline
17611 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17612 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17613 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17615 \begin_inset space ~
17619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17621 key "latexcompanion"
17626 \begin_inset space ~
17630 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17636 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17637 's page break mechanism.
17640 \begin_layout Chapter
17641 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17644 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17651 \begin_layout Standard
17652 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17655 \begin_inset space ~
17661 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17664 \begin_layout Section
17666 \begin_inset Index idx
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17685 \begin_layout Standard
17687 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17690 \begin_layout Description
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17696 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17697 \begin_inset Newline newline
17701 \begin_inset Note Note
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17713 \begin_layout Description
17714 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17715 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17716 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17719 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17720 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17722 \begin_inset space ~
17728 \begin_inset Newline newline
17732 \begin_inset Note Comment
17735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17736 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17745 \begin_layout Description
17747 \begin_inset space ~
17750 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17751 set in the document settings under
17753 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17755 \begin_inset space ~
17761 \begin_inset Newline newline
17765 \begin_inset Newline newline
17769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17779 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17784 of a comment that appears in the output.
17790 \begin_inset Newline newline
17794 \begin_inset Newline newline
17797 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17813 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17816 \begin_layout Section
17818 \begin_inset Index idx
17821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17830 name "sec:Footnotes"
17837 \begin_layout Standard
17839 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17845 or the toolbar button
17848 arg "footnote-insert"
17860 \begin_inset Graphics
17861 filename clipart/footnote.png
17870 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17871 's representation of your footnote.
17881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17900 label, the box will
17904 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17905 Clicking on the box label again will close
17918 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17919 and click on the footnote
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17935 Here is an example footnote:
17943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17952 \begin_layout Standard
17953 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17954 position where the footnote box is placed.
17955 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17956 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17957 according to the document class.
17959 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17960 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17966 ey are described in the
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_layout Section
17979 \begin_inset Index idx
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17991 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17998 \begin_layout Standard
17999 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18001 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18010 or the toolbar button
18013 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18039 appearing within your text.
18040 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18041 's representation of your margin
18050 \begin_layout Standard
18051 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18055 \begin_inset Marginal
18058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18060 This is a marginal note.
18068 \begin_layout Standard
18069 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18070 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18071 pages, right on odd pages.
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18075 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18078 \begin_inset space ~
18086 \begin_inset space ~
18094 \begin_layout Section
18095 Graphics and Images
18096 \begin_inset Index idx
18099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18106 \begin_inset Index idx
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18118 name "sec:Graphics"
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18127 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18130 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18139 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18142 \begin_layout Standard
18143 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18148 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18149 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18151 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18152 \begin_inset space ~
18156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18158 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18165 \begin_layout Standard
18170 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18171 of the image in the output.
18172 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18176 \begin_inset space ~
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18193 \begin_inset space ~
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18202 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18203 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18211 \begin_layout Standard
18215 \begin_inset space ~
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18224 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18225 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18227 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18232 \begin_inset space ~
18237 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18238 with the image size is printed.
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18243 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18245 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18250 \begin_inset Graphics
18251 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18259 \begin_layout Standard
18260 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18261 the image into a float, see section
18262 \begin_inset space ~
18266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18268 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18275 \begin_layout Subsection
18277 \begin_inset Index idx
18280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18289 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18296 \begin_layout Standard
18297 You can insert images in any known file format.
18298 But as we explained in section
18299 \begin_inset space ~
18303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18305 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18309 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18311 therefore uses the program
18315 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18316 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18317 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18324 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18331 \begin_layout Standard
18332 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18335 \begin_layout Description
18337 \begin_inset space ~
18340 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18341 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18342 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 Graphics Interchange Format
18347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 (GIF, file extension
18351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 \begin_inset Index idx
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 Portable Network Graphics
18399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18402 (PNG, file extension
18403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18415 \begin_inset Index idx
18418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 (JPG, file extension
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18479 \begin_inset Index idx
18482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 \begin_layout Description
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18518 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18520 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18521 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18522 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18523 \begin_inset Newline newline
18526 Scalable image formats can be
18527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18530 Scalable Vector Graphics
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 (SVG, file extension
18535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18547 \begin_inset Index idx
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18582 Encapsulated PostScript
18583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 (EPS, file extension
18587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18599 \begin_inset Index idx
18602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18634 Portable Document Format
18635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18638 (PDF, file extension
18639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18651 \begin_inset Index idx
18654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18669 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18670 result will not be scalable.
18671 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18677 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18693 \begin_layout Subsection
18694 Grouping of Image Settings
18695 \begin_inset Index idx
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 Images ! Settings grouping
18707 \begin_layout Standard
18708 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18710 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18711 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18713 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18714 need to manually change each of them.
18718 \begin_layout Standard
18719 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18722 \begin_inset space ~
18726 \begin_inset space ~
18738 \begin_inset space ~
18742 \begin_inset space ~
18748 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18749 and checking the name of the desired group.
18752 \begin_layout Section
18754 \begin_inset Index idx
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18773 \begin_layout Standard
18774 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18777 arg "tabular-insert"
18782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18786 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18787 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18788 from the rest of the table.
18789 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18790 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18792 Here is an example table:
18795 \begin_layout Standard
18797 \begin_inset Tabular
18798 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18799 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 \begin_layout Subsection
19007 \begin_layout Standard
19008 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19011 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19015 This brings up the table dialog.
19016 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19017 cursor is placed currently.
19018 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19019 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19020 done on all of your selection.
19023 \begin_layout Standard
19024 In addition to the table dialog, the
19027 \begin_inset space ~
19032 helps you in setting table properties.
19033 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19036 \begin_layout Standard
19040 \begin_inset space ~
19045 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19046 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19047 current cell respectively.
19048 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19050 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19051 of text, see section
19052 \begin_inset space ~
19056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19058 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19065 \begin_layout Standard
19066 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19067 using the check box
19076 This will merge the cells to
19080 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19081 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19082 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19083 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19084 in the last row without the upper border:
19087 \begin_layout Standard
19089 \begin_inset Tabular
19090 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19091 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19092 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19106 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 \begin_layout Standard
19227 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19228 -arguments for the table.
19229 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19230 explained in the chapter
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19243 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19244 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19245 but are visible in the output.
19248 \begin_layout Standard
19249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 Most DVI-viewers are
19261 able to display rotations.
19269 \begin_layout Standard
19274 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19279 adds lines for all cell borders.
19282 \begin_layout Subsection
19284 \begin_inset Index idx
19287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 Tables ! Multi-page
19294 \begin_inset Index idx
19297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19306 \begin_layout Standard
19307 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19310 \begin_inset space ~
19314 \begin_inset space ~
19322 \begin_inset space ~
19327 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19328 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19331 \begin_layout Description
19336 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19337 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19338 Except for the first page, if
19341 \begin_inset space ~
19349 \begin_layout Description
19353 \begin_inset space ~
19358 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19359 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19362 \begin_layout Description
19367 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19368 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19369 except for the last page, if
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19380 \begin_layout Description
19384 \begin_inset space ~
19389 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19390 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19393 \begin_layout Description
19394 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19395 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19401 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19404 \begin_inset space ~
19412 \begin_layout Standard
19413 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19414 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19415 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19421 In this context, first means first in this order:
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19436 \begin_inset space ~
19441 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19444 \begin_layout Standard
19446 \begin_inset Tabular
19447 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19448 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19449 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19450 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19451 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19452 <row endfirsthead="true">
19453 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19464 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <row endfirsthead="true">
19484 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <row endhead="true">
19517 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 <row endhead="true">
19548 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <row endfoot="true">
19581 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <row endlastfoot="true">
21563 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 \begin_layout Subsection
21602 \begin_inset Index idx
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21614 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21621 \begin_layout Standard
21622 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21623 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21624 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21625 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21629 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21632 \begin_layout Standard
21633 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21634 for the column in the table dialog.
21635 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21636 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21640 \begin_layout Standard
21642 \begin_inset Tabular
21643 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21644 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21646 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21647 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 This is longer now.
21797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21849 This is longer now.
21854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 \begin_layout Standard
21881 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21882 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21888 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21894 Selection with the mouse or with
21898 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21899 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21900 the selection from outside the table.
21903 \begin_layout Section
21905 \begin_inset Index idx
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21924 \begin_layout Subsection
21928 \begin_layout Standard
21929 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21930 have a fixed location.
21932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21939 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21947 \begin_inset space ~
21952 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21953 too many notes on the current page.
21956 \begin_layout Standard
21957 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21958 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21959 and pages without text.
21960 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21961 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21962 Floats are therefore numbered.
21963 Referencing is described in section
21964 \begin_inset space ~
21968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21970 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21977 \begin_layout Standard
21978 To insert a float, use the menu
21980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21984 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21985 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21987 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21988 \begin_inset Index idx
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21998 paragraph within the float.
21999 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22000 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22001 left-clicking on the box label.
22002 A closed float box looks like this:
22003 \begin_inset Graphics
22004 filename clipart/float.png
22009 – a gray button with a red label.
22012 \begin_layout Standard
22013 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22015 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22018 \begin_layout Subsection
22020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22022 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22027 \begin_inset Index idx
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 Floats ! Figure floats
22039 \begin_layout Standard
22041 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22047 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22051 was created using the menu
22053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22054 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22060 arg "float-insert figure"
22064 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22073 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22077 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22078 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22082 \begin_inset space ~
22090 arg "layout-paragraph"
22096 \begin_layout Standard
22097 \begin_inset Float figure
22102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 \begin_inset Graphics
22105 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22120 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22124 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22137 \begin_layout Standard
22138 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22139 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22150 ) and refer to it using the menu
22152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22158 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22162 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22163 vague references like
22164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22171 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22172 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22182 For more about cross-references, see section
22183 \begin_inset space ~
22187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22189 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22196 \begin_layout Standard
22197 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22198 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22199 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22200 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22201 as described in section
22202 \begin_inset space ~
22206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22208 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22214 \begin_inset space ~
22218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22220 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22224 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22225 You can also set the images one below the other.
22227 \begin_inset space ~
22231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22233 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22240 reference "fig:Platypus"
22244 are the subfigures.
22247 \begin_layout Standard
22248 \begin_inset Float figure
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22258 \begin_inset Float figure
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22269 name "fig:Undefinable"
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 \begin_inset Graphics
22283 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22294 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22298 \begin_inset Float figure
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22309 name "fig:Platypus"
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 \begin_inset Graphics
22323 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22335 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22347 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22351 Two distorted images.
22364 \begin_layout Subsection
22366 \begin_inset Index idx
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 Floats ! Table floats
22378 \begin_layout Standard
22379 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22382 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22385 or the toolbar button
22388 arg "float-insert table"
22392 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22393 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22394 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22396 \begin_inset space ~
22400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22402 reference "tab:Table-float"
22409 \begin_layout Standard
22410 \begin_inset Float table
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22421 name "tab:Table-float"
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 \begin_inset Tabular
22436 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22437 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22438 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22591 \end{array}\right]$
22599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22633 \begin_layout Subsection
22635 \begin_inset Index idx
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 \begin_layout Standard
22649 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22650 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22651 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22653 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22661 \begin_inset space ~
22669 \begin_layout Section
22671 \begin_inset Index idx
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 \begin_layout Standard
22685 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22687 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22688 \begin_inset space \space{}
22695 \begin_layout Standard
22696 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22697 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22703 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22704 and its alignment within the page.
22707 \begin_layout Standard
22709 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22719 height_special "totalheight"
22724 backgroundcolor "none"
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 This is a minipage.
22731 The text is set in an italic style.
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22738 another formatting.
22746 \begin_layout Standard
22747 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22750 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22754 as described in section
22755 \begin_inset space ~
22759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22761 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22766 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22772 \begin_layout Standard
22773 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22783 height_special "totalheight"
22788 backgroundcolor "none"
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22793 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22799 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22803 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22813 height_special "totalheight"
22818 backgroundcolor "none"
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22822 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22823 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22831 \begin_layout Standard
22832 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22838 \begin_layout Standard
22839 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22841 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22848 \begin_inset space ~
22856 \begin_layout Chapter
22857 Mathematical Formulas
22858 \begin_inset Index idx
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 \begin_inset Index idx
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22902 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22910 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22915 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22918 \begin_layout Section
22920 \begin_inset Index idx
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 \begin_layout Standard
22933 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22946 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22948 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22949 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22950 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22959 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22963 \begin_inset space ~
22968 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22971 \begin_layout Standard
22972 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22973 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22976 \begin_layout Standard
22977 This is a line with an inline formula
22978 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22984 \begin_layout Standard
22985 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22986 paragraph, like this one:
22987 \begin_inset Formula
22994 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22997 \begin_layout Standard
22999 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23001 For example, typing
23002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23015 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23016 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23020 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23023 \begin_inset space ~
23031 \begin_layout Subsection
23032 Navigating in Formulas
23033 \begin_inset Index idx
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 \begin_layout Standard
23046 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23047 achieved with the arrow keys.
23049 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23050 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23055 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23056 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23060 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23064 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23067 \end{array}\right]$
23075 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23080 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23081 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23084 \begin_layout Standard
23089 , printed in this document as
23090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23094 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23101 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23102 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23103 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23108 For example, if you want
23109 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23117 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23127 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23131 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23136 , since in the latter case only the
23139 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23144 will be under the square root sign:
23145 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23151 \begin_layout Standard
23152 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23154 \begin_inset Formula
23156 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23165 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23166 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23169 \begin_layout Subsection
23173 \begin_layout Standard
23174 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23175 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23179 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23180 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23181 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23182 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23183 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23187 \begin_layout Subsection
23188 Exponents and Subscripts
23189 \begin_inset Index idx
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 \begin_inset Index idx
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 \begin_layout Standard
23212 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23215 arg "math-superscript"
23221 arg "math-subscript"
23224 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23226 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23229 , type in a formula
23232 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23242 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23248 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23252 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23258 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23264 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23273 , you have to use an extra
23277 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23278 For example, if you want
23279 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23285 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23291 Subscripts are similar: To get
23292 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23298 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23306 \begin_layout Subsection
23308 \begin_inset Index idx
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_layout Standard
23321 Create a fraction either with the command
23327 or by using the icon
23330 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23336 \begin_inset space ~
23342 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23343 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23344 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23349 To move back up, press
23354 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23355 \begin_inset Formula
23357 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23360 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23368 \begin_layout Subsection
23370 \begin_inset Index idx
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 \begin_layout Standard
23383 Roots can be created using the
23386 \begin_inset space ~
23394 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23400 arg "math-insert \\root"
23422 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23428 always produces a square root.
23431 \begin_layout Subsection
23432 Operators with Limits
23433 \begin_inset Index idx
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 \begin_inset Index idx
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23455 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23462 \begin_layout Standard
23464 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23468 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23471 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23472 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23473 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23474 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23475 The sum operator will automatically place its
23476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23483 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23485 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23489 \begin_inset Formula
23491 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23496 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23500 \begin_layout Standard
23501 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23503 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23504 behind the operator and using the menu
23506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23507 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23509 \begin_inset space ~
23513 \begin_inset space ~
23527 \begin_layout Standard
23528 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23537 \begin_inset Index idx
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 \begin_inset Formula
23549 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23554 which will place the
23555 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23567 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23568 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23574 \begin_layout Standard
23575 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23582 Have a look at section
23583 \begin_inset space ~
23587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23589 reference "subsec:Functions"
23593 for an explanation of function macros.
23596 \begin_layout Subsection
23598 \begin_inset Index idx
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23610 \begin_layout Standard
23611 Most math symbols can be found in the
23614 \begin_inset space ~
23619 under one of several categories; including
23636 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23640 \begin_layout Standard
23641 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23642 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23643 don't have to use the
23646 \begin_inset space ~
23651 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23653 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23656 \begin_layout Subsection
23658 \begin_inset Index idx
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 \begin_layout Standard
23671 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23677 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23683 \begin_inset space ~
23691 arg "math-insert \\space"
23695 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23696 For example, the sequence
23701 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23704 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23706 \begin_inset Graphics
23707 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23712 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23713 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23714 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23715 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23716 , because they are negative
23718 Here are two examples:
23721 \begin_layout Standard
23731 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23737 \begin_layout Standard
23747 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23753 \begin_layout Subsection
23755 \begin_inset Index idx
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23767 name "subsec:Functions"
23774 \begin_layout Standard
23778 \begin_inset space ~
23783 contains under the button
23786 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23789 a number of function macros, such as
23790 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23794 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23802 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23809 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23810 avoid confusions, because
23811 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23815 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23821 \begin_layout Standard
23822 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23824 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23828 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23834 \begin_layout Standard
23835 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23836 are placed, as described in section
23837 \begin_inset space ~
23841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23843 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23850 \begin_layout Subsection
23852 \begin_inset Index idx
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 \begin_layout Standard
23865 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23867 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23868 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23869 commands, for example, to enter
23870 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23873 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23874 Our example is entered by typing
23879 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23886 \begin_inset space ~
23890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23892 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23896 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23899 \begin_layout Standard
23900 \begin_inset Float table
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23911 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23915 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_inset Tabular
23926 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23927 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23928 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24512 \begin_layout Standard
24513 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24516 \begin_inset space ~
24524 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24527 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24531 \begin_layout Section
24532 Brackets and Delimiters
24533 \begin_inset Index idx
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 \begin_inset Index idx
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24555 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24562 \begin_layout Standard
24563 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24565 For some purposes, using just the keys
24570 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24571 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24572 toolbar delimiter icon
24575 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24579 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24580 \begin_inset Formula
24582 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24590 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24591 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24595 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24598 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24604 \begin_inset Formula
24606 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24614 \begin_layout Standard
24615 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24616 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24620 \begin_layout Standard
24621 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24622 left side and right side.
24623 If you use the option
24626 \begin_inset space ~
24631 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24632 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24634 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24639 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24640 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24643 \begin_layout Standard
24644 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24645 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24646 is to go inside the brackets.
24647 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24652 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24653 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24654 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24658 arg "math-delim ( )"
24664 \begin_layout Section
24665 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24666 \begin_inset Index idx
24669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 \begin_inset Index idx
24679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24686 \begin_inset Index idx
24689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24698 \begin_layout Standard
24699 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24703 \begin_inset space ~
24711 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24715 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24716 Here is an example:
24717 \begin_inset Formula
24719 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24728 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24729 \begin_inset space ~
24733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24735 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24740 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24741 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24742 This alignment is set in the box
24747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24796 for every column as default.
24797 For example, the sequence
24798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24809 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24810 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24811 corresponds to the relevant column.
24812 The result will look like this:
24813 \begin_inset Formula
24816 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24817 column & has & has\,right\\
24818 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24828 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24831 arg "newline-insert newline"
24834 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24835 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24840 or the math toolbar.
24843 \begin_layout Standard
24844 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24845 It can be created with the menu
24847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24848 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24850 \begin_inset space ~
24862 Here is an example:
24863 \begin_inset Formula
24877 \begin_layout Standard
24878 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24881 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24884 arg "newline-insert newline"
24888 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24893 arg "newline-insert newline"
24896 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24904 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24905 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24906 A new row is created by every further entry of
24909 arg "newline-insert newline"
24913 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24914 Here is an example:
24915 \begin_inset Formula
24917 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24918 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24923 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24924 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24925 \begin_inset Formula
24927 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24935 \begin_layout Standard
24936 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24943 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24944 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24947 reference "eq:asquared"
24952 The other types are described in section
24953 \begin_inset space ~
24957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24959 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24966 \begin_layout Section
24967 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24968 \begin_inset Index idx
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 Math ! Formula numbering
24978 \begin_inset Index idx
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 Math ! Referencing formulas
24988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24990 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24997 \begin_layout Standard
24998 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25000 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25001 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25003 \begin_inset space ~
25007 \begin_inset space ~
25015 arg "math-number-toggle"
25019 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25020 within parentheses.
25021 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25022 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25023 the document class.
25024 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25025 separated by a dot:
25026 \begin_inset Formula
25036 arg "math-number-toggle"
25039 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25040 You can only number displayed formulas.
25043 \begin_layout Standard
25044 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25046 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25047 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25049 \begin_inset space ~
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25061 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25064 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25065 \begin_inset Formula
25068 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25074 To number all lines use the shortcut
25077 arg "math-number-toggle"
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25084 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25087 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25088 A label is inserted with the menu
25090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25099 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25100 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25101 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25113 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25114 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25115 We inserted in the following example the label
25116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25123 in the second line:
25124 \begin_inset Formula
25126 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25127 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25132 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25133 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25134 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25138 \begin_inset space ~
25146 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25150 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25151 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25152 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25153 as the formula number:
25156 \begin_layout Standard
25157 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25160 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25167 \begin_layout Standard
25168 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25169 's cross-reference box are described in section
25170 \begin_inset space ~
25174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25176 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25181 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25189 \begin_layout Section
25190 User defined math macros
25191 \begin_inset Index idx
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 \begin_layout Standard
25205 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25206 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25207 Math macros are explained in section
25210 \begin_inset space ~
25222 \begin_layout Section
25226 \begin_layout Subsection
25228 \begin_inset Index idx
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 \begin_layout Standard
25241 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25242 To set a font in a formula, use the
25245 \begin_inset space ~
25253 arg "math-insert \\font"
25256 , or enter its command, listed in table
25257 \begin_inset space ~
25261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25263 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25270 \begin_layout Standard
25271 \begin_inset Float table
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25282 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25286 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 \begin_inset Tabular
25297 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25298 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25473 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25507 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 \begin_layout Standard
25569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25593 \begin_layout Standard
25594 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25595 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25600 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25601 space when you need a space in the box.
25602 Here is an example where
25603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25614 denotes the set of numbers:
25615 \begin_inset Formula
25617 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25625 \begin_layout Standard
25626 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25627 You can, for example, put a character in
25636 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25640 \begin_inset Newline newline
25643 So it is better not to use this feature.
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25648 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25652 \begin_inset Newline newline
25655 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25661 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25662 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25668 \begin_layout Standard
25675 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25678 \begin_layout Standard
25679 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25682 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25684 \begin_inset space ~
25692 \begin_layout Subsection
25694 \begin_inset Index idx
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25706 \begin_layout Standard
25707 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25709 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25713 \begin_inset space ~
25717 \begin_inset space ~
25725 \begin_inset space ~
25733 arg "math-insert \\font"
25737 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25738 in black instead of blue.
25739 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25740 Here is an example:
25741 \begin_inset Formula
25744 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25745 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25754 \begin_layout Subsection
25756 \begin_inset Index idx
25759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25769 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25770 automatically chosen in most situations.
25788 For most characters,
25796 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25797 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25802 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25803 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25804 thinks are appropriate.
25805 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25808 arg "math-insert \\style"
25812 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25813 For example, you can set
25814 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25817 , which is normally in
25826 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25830 The four styles are used in the following example:
25833 \begin_layout Standard
25834 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25838 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25842 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25846 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25854 is set in a particular size with the menu
25856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25858 \begin_inset space ~
25863 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25864 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25865 will be adjusted to correspond.
25866 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25877 \begin_layout Standard
25881 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25887 \begin_layout Section
25888 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25890 \begin_inset Index idx
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25900 \begin_inset Index idx
25903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 \begin_layout Standard
25914 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25915 that are in common use.
25918 \begin_layout Subsection
25919 Enabling AMS-Support
25922 \begin_layout Standard
25923 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25924 the document by selecting the checkbox
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25931 \begin_inset space ~
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25946 \begin_inset Index idx
25949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25950 Document ! Settings
25958 \begin_inset space ~
25964 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25965 -errors in formulas,
25966 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25969 \begin_layout Subsection
25971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25973 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25978 \begin_inset Index idx
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25982 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25990 \begin_layout Standard
25991 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25992 provides a selection of different formula types.
25994 allows you to choose between
26015 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26016 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26022 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26025 \begin_layout Chapter
26029 \begin_layout Section
26031 \begin_inset Index idx
26034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26043 name "sec:Cross-References"
26050 \begin_layout Standard
26051 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26052 's strengths is cross-references.
26053 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26055 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26056 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26057 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26060 \begin_layout Enumerate
26064 \begin_layout Enumerate
26065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26067 name "enu:Second-item"
26074 \begin_layout Enumerate
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26079 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26084 or by pressing the toolbar button
26091 A gray label box like this:
26092 \begin_inset Graphics
26093 filename clipart/label.png
26097 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26099 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26134 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26135 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26151 \begin_layout Standard
26152 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26157 or the toolbar button
26160 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26164 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26165 \begin_inset Graphics
26166 filename clipart/reference.png
26170 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26172 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26185 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26189 \begin_layout Standard
26190 As an alternative to
26192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26195 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26200 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26201 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26217 \begin_inset space ~
26221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26223 reference "enu:Second-item"
26230 \begin_layout Standard
26231 It is recommended to use a protected space
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26236 described in section
26237 \begin_inset space ~
26241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26243 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26252 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26253 line breaks between them.
26256 \begin_layout Standard
26257 There are six formats of cross-references:
26260 \begin_layout Description
26261 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26264 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26271 \begin_layout Description
26272 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26273 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26285 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26292 \begin_layout Description
26293 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26294 \begin_inset space ~
26298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26299 LatexCommand pageref
26300 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26307 \begin_layout Description
26309 \begin_inset space ~
26313 \begin_inset space ~
26316 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26318 LatexCommand vpageref
26319 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26324 \begin_inset Newline newline
26327 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26328 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26329 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26330 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26331 it prints “on the next page”.
26332 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26335 \begin_layout Description
26337 \begin_inset space ~
26341 \begin_inset space ~
26345 \begin_inset space ~
26348 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26351 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26356 \begin_inset Newline newline
26359 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26365 ; otherwise it behaves like
26369 \begin_inset space ~
26373 \begin_inset space ~
26382 \begin_layout Description
26384 \begin_inset space ~
26387 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26388 \begin_inset Newline newline
26392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26400 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26410 \begin_inset Index idx
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26415 -packages ! prettyref
26421 \begin_inset Index idx
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26426 -packages ! refstyle
26437 \begin_inset Newline newline
26440 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26441 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26444 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26457 is the default and preferred because
26461 supports only English documents.
26462 The format is specified by using the command
26474 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26475 preamble of the document.
26476 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26489 ) can be done with this command
26490 \begin_inset Newline newline
26497 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26502 \begin_inset Newline newline
26505 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26509 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26516 \begin_layout Description
26518 \begin_inset space ~
26521 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26523 LatexCommand nameref
26524 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26531 \begin_layout Standard
26532 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26533 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26535 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26539 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26543 \begin_layout Standard
26544 You can only use the style
26548 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26552 is always possible.
26555 \begin_layout Standard
26556 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26557 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26559 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26560 \begin_inset space ~
26564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26566 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26573 \begin_layout Standard
26574 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26578 \begin_inset space ~
26582 \begin_inset space ~
26587 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26588 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26596 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26597 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26600 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 You can change labels at any time.
26608 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26609 do not need to think about this.
26612 \begin_layout Standard
26613 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26615 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 References are described in detail in the section
26621 \begin_inset space ~
26631 \begin_inset space ~
26639 \begin_layout Section
26640 Table of Contents and other Listings
26641 \begin_inset Index idx
26644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 \begin_inset Index idx
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 Navigating ! Outline
26661 \begin_inset Index idx
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26680 \begin_layout Subsection
26682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26684 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26691 \begin_layout Standard
26692 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26695 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26697 \begin_inset space ~
26701 \begin_inset space ~
26707 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26709 If you click on it, the
26713 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26714 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26715 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26717 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26719 \begin_inset space ~
26724 that is described in section
26725 \begin_inset space ~
26729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26731 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26738 \begin_layout Standard
26739 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26740 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26742 \begin_inset space ~
26746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26748 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26752 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26754 \begin_inset space ~
26758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26760 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26764 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26766 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26769 \begin_layout Subsection
26770 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26773 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26780 \begin_layout Standard
26781 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26783 You can insert them via the
26785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26789 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26792 \begin_layout Section
26793 URLs and Hyperlinks
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset Index idx
26807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26816 \begin_layout Subsection
26818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26836 \begin_layout Standard
26837 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26839 \begin_inset Flex URL
26842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26852 \begin_layout Standard
26853 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26859 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26863 \begin_layout Standard
26864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26881 \begin_layout Subsection
26883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26885 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26892 \begin_layout Standard
26893 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26898 or with the toolbar button
26905 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26914 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26915 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26916 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26918 name "LyX's homepage"
26919 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26923 , an Email address like this:
26924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26926 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26927 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26932 , or a link to a file.
26935 \begin_layout Standard
26936 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26949 to the link target.
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26953 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26954 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26955 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26956 the text style dialog.
26957 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26963 name "LyX's homepage"
26964 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26971 \begin_layout Standard
26972 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26976 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26979 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26983 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26985 \begin_inset Newline newline
26993 \begin_inset Newline newline
27000 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27003 \begin_layout Section
27005 \begin_inset Index idx
27008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27017 name "sec:Appendices"
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27025 Appendices are created with the menu
27027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27029 \begin_inset space ~
27033 \begin_inset space ~
27039 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27040 as the appendix part of the book.
27041 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27044 \begin_layout Standard
27045 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27046 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27047 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27048 and the subsection number.
27049 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27053 \begin_layout Standard
27055 \begin_inset space ~
27059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27061 reference "chap:Credits"
27066 \begin_inset space ~
27070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27072 reference "subsec:Export"
27079 \begin_layout Section
27081 \begin_inset Index idx
27084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27093 name "sec:Bibliography"
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27101 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27103 You can include a bibliography database,
27107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27108 Known under the name
27109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27112 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27122 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27123 manually, using the paragraph environment
27127 , which was described in section
27128 \begin_inset space ~
27132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27134 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27139 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27140 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27144 use a bibliography database.
27147 \begin_layout Subsection
27148 The Bibliography Environment
27151 \begin_layout Standard
27156 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27158 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27167 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27169 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27179 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27182 \begin_layout Standard
27183 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27188 or the toolbar button
27191 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27195 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27196 containing the available citations.
27197 Select one or more keys from the list and
27207 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27208 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27212 \begin_layout Standard
27213 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27214 entry with surrounding brackets.
27219 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27220 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27232 \begin_layout Standard
27236 Companion Second Edition
27239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27241 key "latexcompanion"
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 The \SpecialChar LyX
27250 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27260 \begin_layout Standard
27261 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27266 \begin_inset space ~
27274 arg "layout-paragraph"
27278 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27281 \begin_layout Subsection
27282 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27284 \begin_inset Index idx
27287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27288 Bibliography ! Databases
27294 \begin_inset Index idx
27297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27298 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27307 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27314 \begin_layout Standard
27315 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27321 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27323 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27324 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27329 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27331 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27332 your working field in a database.
27333 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27334 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27335 list for that document.
27336 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 The database is a text file with the file extension
27342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27353 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27354 The format is explained in
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27361 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27365 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27370 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27371 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27372 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27374 \begin_inset Flex URL
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27387 \begin_layout Standard
27388 To use a database, use the menu
27390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27395 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27397 \begin_inset space ~
27403 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27404 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27411 Add bibliography to TOC
27413 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27418 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27419 in the document or just the cited references.
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27423 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27435 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27436 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27437 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27438 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27440 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27446 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27447 \begin_inset Newline newline
27451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27453 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27465 \begin_layout Standard
27466 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27469 \begin_layout Standard
27470 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27471 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27473 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27488 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27492 The following variants are possible:
27495 \begin_layout Description
27496 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27497 with other bibliography packages (e.
27498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27502 \begin_inset space \space{}
27509 ), only with the package
27513 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27517 \begin_layout Description
27518 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27519 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27520 with all bibliography packages, except
27525 \begin_layout Description
27526 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27531 , works with all bibliography packages
27534 \begin_layout Standard
27535 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27536 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27538 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27541 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27554 \begin_layout Standard
27555 When you select the option
27557 Sectioned bibliography
27561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27565 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27566 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27568 Customizing Bibliographies
27572 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27577 Additional Features
27582 \begin_layout Standard
27583 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27584 the two methods of creating them.
27585 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27586 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27587 We used the style file
27591 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27594 \begin_layout Subsection
27596 \begin_inset Index idx
27599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27600 Bibliography ! Citation format
27608 \begin_layout Standard
27609 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27610 For this feature you need to enable the option
27616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27620 \begin_inset Index idx
27623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 Document ! Settings
27634 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27635 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27636 style files as explained in
27637 the previous section.
27640 \begin_layout Standard
27641 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27642 the citation reference window.
27643 Here is an example where the text
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27648 \begin_inset space ~
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27655 appears after the reference:
27658 \begin_layout Standard
27660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27663 key "latexcompanion"
27670 \begin_layout Section
27672 \begin_inset Index idx
27675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27691 \begin_layout Standard
27692 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27701 or the toolbar button
27708 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27709 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27710 by \SpecialChar LyX
27711 as the index entry.
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27715 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27718 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27720 \begin_inset space ~
27726 A light blue box labeled
27727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27738 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27739 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27743 \begin_layout Standard
27744 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27745 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27746 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27747 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27749 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27751 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27758 \begin_layout Subsection
27759 Grouping Index Entries
27760 \begin_inset Index idx
27763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27775 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27776 lists under the entry
27777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27785 First we create the entry
27786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27800 reference "subsec:Lists"
27805 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27806 \begin_inset space ~
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27812 reference "sec:Itemize"
27816 , we insert the command
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27825 \begin_layout Standard
27829 \begin_layout Standard
27835 \begin_layout Standard
27836 for the enumerated list in section
27837 \begin_inset space ~
27841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27843 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 The exclamation mark
27852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27859 marks the grouping levels.
27860 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27861 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27862 If we don't have an index entry for
27863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27873 \begin_layout Subsection
27875 \begin_inset Index idx
27878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 Index ! Page ranges
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27890 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27891 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27892 an index entry in section
27893 \begin_inset space ~
27897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27899 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27906 \begin_layout Standard
27909 Paragraph environments|(
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27913 and another entry at the end of section
27914 \begin_inset space ~
27918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27920 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27930 Paragraph environments|)
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27958 respectively start and end the index range.
27959 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27960 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27961 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27962 An example is the index entry
27963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27966 Document ! Settings
27967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27973 \begin_layout Subsection
27975 \begin_inset Index idx
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27979 Index ! Cross referencing
27987 \begin_layout Standard
27988 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27989 We referred for example in the index entry
27990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27998 \begin_inset space ~
28002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28004 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28008 ) to the index entry
28009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28016 in the same section using the entry
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28022 GIF|see{Image formats}
28025 \begin_layout Standard
28026 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28028 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28029 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28032 \begin_layout Subsection
28034 \begin_inset Index idx
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 Index ! Entry order
28046 \begin_layout Standard
28047 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28048 follow the rules for the index order.
28049 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28057 \begin_inset space ~
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28063 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28072 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28073 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28098 \begin_inset Index idx
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 Dummy entries ! maïs
28108 \begin_inset Index idx
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28112 Dummy entries ! maître
28118 \begin_inset Index idx
28121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28122 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28127 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28128 maïs, maison, maître.
28129 To achieve this, we use the command
28132 \begin_layout Standard
28135 previous entry@current entry
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 In our case we want to have
28140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28155 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28164 \begin_layout Standard
28165 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28166 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28168 See the next subsection for an example.
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28184 to generate the index (see section
28185 \begin_inset space ~
28189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28191 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28200 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28201 -package aeguill in section
28202 \begin_inset space ~
28206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28208 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28212 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28213 -packages although all these index
28214 commands start with
28215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28228 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28233 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28248 \begin_layout Standard
28260 \begin_layout Subsection
28262 \begin_inset Index idx
28265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28266 Index ! Entry layout
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28275 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28276 \begin_inset Index idx
28279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28282 This is an italic dummy entry
28287 You can also format the page number using the character
28288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28295 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28296 -command without a backslash.
28297 We can write for example
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28303 italic page number:|textit
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 to get the page number in italic.
28308 \begin_inset Index idx
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28312 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28317 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28318 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28336 \begin_inset space ~
28342 Have a look at section
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28349 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28353 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28357 \begin_layout Standard
28358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28366 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28370 to generate the index, see section
28371 \begin_inset space ~
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28377 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28386 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28391 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28392 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28395 key "latexcompanion"
28407 \begin_layout Standard
28408 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28410 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28411 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28412 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28413 If so, put the following in the preamble
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28428 \begin_layout Standard
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28439 in the index entry.
28440 \begin_inset Index idx
28443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28449 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28450 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28451 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28454 \begin_layout Standard
28455 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28456 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28457 a bold font for all index entries.
28458 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28470 documentation for details,
28471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28473 key "makeindex,xindy"
28480 \begin_layout Subsection
28482 \begin_inset Index idx
28485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28494 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28501 \begin_layout Standard
28502 If the index generation program
28506 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28507 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28511 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28512 distribution, is used.
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28522 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28523 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28524 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28525 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28535 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28537 dialog, see section
28538 \begin_inset space ~
28542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28544 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28549 The available options are listed and explained in
28550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28552 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28557 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28563 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28566 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28567 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28571 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28572 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28575 \begin_layout Subsection
28579 \begin_layout Standard
28580 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28581 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28589 next to the standard index.
28591 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28592 that add this feature.
28599 \begin_inset Index idx
28602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28604 -packages ! splitidx
28609 package to generate multiple indexes.
28610 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28616 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28625 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28626 style, but it also includes
28627 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28628 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28636 \begin_layout Standard
28637 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28638 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28641 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28644 and select the option
28646 Use multiple Indexes
28653 already contains the standard index
28654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28662 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28663 also appear as a heading) to the
28667 input field and press the
28672 The new index now also appears in the list.
28673 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28674 label color to the new index.
28677 \begin_layout Standard
28678 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28688 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28689 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28690 are additional features:
28693 \begin_layout Itemize
28694 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28695 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28698 \begin_layout Itemize
28699 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28700 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28708 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28709 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28710 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28711 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28714 \begin_layout Section
28715 Nomenclature/Glossary
28716 \begin_inset Index idx
28719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 \begin_inset Index idx
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28760 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28767 \begin_layout Standard
28768 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28769 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28770 called nomenclature or glossary.
28773 \begin_layout Standard
28774 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28781 \begin_inset Index idx
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 -packages ! nomencl
28792 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28800 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28804 \begin_layout Standard
28805 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28806 and then use the menu
28808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28814 \begin_inset space ~
28819 or the toolbar button
28822 arg "nomencl-insert"
28827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28838 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28841 \begin_layout Standard
28842 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28843 The first is the term or
28847 that you wish to define.
28852 of the term or symbol.
28855 \begin_layout Standard
28856 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28864 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28865 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28873 \begin_layout Subsection
28874 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28875 \begin_inset Index idx
28878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28879 Nomenclature ! Layout
28887 \begin_layout Standard
28888 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28892 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28899 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28907 \begin_inset Newline newline
28915 \begin_inset Newline newline
28921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28928 character starts/ends the formula.
28929 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28930 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28942 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28954 -syntax is given in section
28955 \begin_inset space ~
28959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28961 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28968 \begin_layout Standard
28972 \begin_inset space ~
28977 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28979 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28991 in this document is:
28992 \begin_inset Newline newline
28997 dummy entry for the character
29002 \begin_inset Newline newline
29014 \begin_inset space ~
29024 font use the command
29053 \begin_layout Standard
29054 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29059 \begin_inset space \space{}
29063 \begin_inset Newline newline
29079 \begin_inset Newline newline
29082 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29083 This command will make the font of all symbols
29090 \begin_inset space ~
29098 \begin_layout Standard
29099 If the characters |
29100 \begin_inset space \space{}
29104 \begin_inset space \space{}
29108 \begin_inset space \space{}
29112 \begin_inset space \space{}
29116 \begin_inset space \space{}
29119 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29120 a quote character in front of them.
29121 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29122 LatexCommand nomenclature
29123 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29124 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29131 \begin_layout Subsection
29132 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29133 \begin_inset Index idx
29136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29137 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29147 -code of the symbol
29149 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29151 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29154 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29155 LatexCommand nomenclature
29157 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29164 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29168 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29169 LatexCommand nomenclature
29172 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29177 They will be sorted by
29178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29204 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29207 will be sorted before the
29211 since the character
29212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29219 is considered in sorting.
29222 \begin_layout Standard
29223 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29226 \begin_inset space ~
29231 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29232 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29234 For the example given, you can insert
29238 in this field for the
29239 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29246 will be located before
29247 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29254 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29268 \begin_layout Subsection
29269 Nomenclature Options
29270 \begin_inset Index idx
29273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29274 Nomenclature ! Options
29282 \begin_layout Standard
29287 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29288 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29291 \begin_layout Description
29292 refeq Appends the phrase
29293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29308 to every nomenclature entry, where
29314 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29317 \begin_layout Description
29318 refpage Appends the phrase
29319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29334 to every nomenclature entry, where
29340 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29343 \begin_layout Description
29344 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29348 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29349 class options list in the
29351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29355 In this document the options
29362 \begin_layout Standard
29363 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29370 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29371 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29376 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29379 \begin_layout Description
29389 \begin_layout Description
29392 nomrefpage Like the
29399 \begin_layout Description
29402 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29411 \begin_layout Description
29415 \begin_inset space ~
29421 \begin_inset space ~
29426 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29429 \begin_layout Standard
29431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29438 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29439 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29451 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29454 \begin_inset Newline newline
29461 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29466 \begin_inset Newline newline
29470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29485 by their translation.
29488 \begin_layout Subsection
29489 Printing the Nomenclature
29490 \begin_inset Index idx
29493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29494 Nomenclature ! Printing
29502 \begin_layout Standard
29503 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29522 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29523 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29524 You can choose between these settings:
29527 \begin_layout Description
29528 Default a space of 1
29529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29535 \begin_layout Description
29537 \begin_inset space ~
29541 \begin_inset space ~
29544 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29547 \begin_layout Description
29548 Custom custom space
29551 \begin_layout Standard
29552 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29561 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29569 For example, in order to change the name to
29573 , add the following line to the preamble:
29576 \begin_layout Standard
29584 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29587 \begin_layout Subsection
29588 Nomenclature Program
29589 \begin_inset Index idx
29592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29593 Nomenclature ! Program
29599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29601 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29608 \begin_layout Standard
29614 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29615 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29617 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29622 by adding options, see section
29623 \begin_inset space ~
29627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29629 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29634 The available options are listed and explained in
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29637 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29644 \begin_layout Section
29646 \begin_inset Index idx
29649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29656 \begin_inset Index idx
29659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29660 Document ! Branches
29666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29668 name "sec:Branches"
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29676 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29677 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29678 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29679 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29683 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29684 allows you to put text into branches.
29685 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29686 To create a branch, either select the menu
29688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29689 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29692 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29694 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29701 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29702 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29703 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29704 and whether the name of the branch should
29705 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29706 (see below for an example).
29707 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29708 to the name of the other) and to add
29709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29721 \begin_inset space ~
29724 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29725 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29730 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29735 where you can choose a branch.
29736 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29740 \begin_layout Standard
29741 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29742 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29745 \begin_layout Standard
29746 \begin_inset Branch Question
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29765 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29784 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29785 Consider for example a file
29786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29793 which has the above branches.
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29802 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29826 branch were inactive,
29827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29842 branch was active, likewise
29843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29858 branch was active, and
29859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29862 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29866 if both branches were active.
29867 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29868 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29874 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29875 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
29876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29883 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
29889 \begin_inset Branch Question
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29895 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
29896 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
29904 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
29905 To control whether a particular inset is
29906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29913 , right-click on the inset button and choose
29914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29920 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29926 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
29930 \begin_layout Standard
29931 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29939 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29940 definitions for each branch.
29941 For example you can define for the question branch
29945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29946 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29947 -syntax, see section
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29954 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29966 \begin_layout Standard
29976 \begin_layout Standard
29986 \begin_layout Standard
29987 and for the answer branch
29990 \begin_layout Standard
30000 \begin_layout Standard
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 \begin_inset Branch Question
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30048 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30084 \begin_layout Standard
30085 Now it is possible to use the
30089 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30096 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30099 commands to obtain conditional output.
30100 Here is an example formula where only the
30107 \begin_inset Formula
30109 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30117 \begin_layout Standard
30118 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30133 \begin_inset space \space{}
30136 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30138 For this advanced usage, see the
30144 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30149 \begin_layout Section
30151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30153 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30158 \begin_inset Index idx
30161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30177 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30179 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30185 \begin_inset Index idx
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 -packages ! hyperref
30195 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30196 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30197 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30198 part of the document.
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 The header information in the dialog tab
30207 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30208 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30209 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30210 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30214 \begin_inset space ~
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30223 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30224 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30225 and author entries.
30229 \begin_inset space ~
30233 \begin_inset space ~
30237 \begin_inset space ~
30242 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30245 \begin_layout Standard
30246 You can specify in the dialog tab
30250 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30255 \begin_inset space ~
30259 \begin_inset space ~
30263 \begin_inset space ~
30268 option allows long links to be split;
30271 \begin_inset space ~
30275 \begin_inset space ~
30279 \begin_inset space ~
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30292 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30295 \begin_inset space ~
30300 colors the different links.
30301 The default colors are:
30304 \begin_layout Labeling
30305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30310 for hyperlinks and URLs
30313 \begin_layout Labeling
30314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30322 \begin_layout Labeling
30323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 but you can change these in the field
30337 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30343 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30351 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30352 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30353 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30361 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30362 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30363 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30373 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30374 when opening the PDF.
30376 \begin_inset space ~
30379 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30380 \begin_inset space ~
30383 1 will only display the sections.
30386 \begin_layout Standard
30387 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30388 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30394 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30404 \begin_layout Section
30406 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30410 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30417 \begin_layout Subsection
30420 \begin_inset Index idx
30423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30433 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 As \SpecialChar LyX
30442 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30443 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30444 commands and constructs,
30447 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30448 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30449 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30450 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30451 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30452 cannot support all packages and
30456 \begin_layout Standard
30457 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30458 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30459 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30463 Code box is created by the menu
30465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30467 \begin_inset space ~
30472 or by the toolbar button
30485 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30496 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30498 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30499 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30506 , you can write the command part
30512 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30513 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30517 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30518 Code box behind the word.
30519 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30520 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 \begin_inset Graphics
30526 filename clipart/ERT.png
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30539 This is a line with a
30543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30567 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30576 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30577 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30578 know that the command is finished.
30586 \begin_layout Subsection
30587 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30589 \begin_inset Argument 1
30592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30593 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30600 \begin_inset Index idx
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30613 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30620 \begin_layout Standard
30621 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30622 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30623 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30624 uses in the background.
30625 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30626 is based on commands, you can
30627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30635 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30636 any time if you know the right commands.
30637 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30638 is the end of the day.
30639 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30640 all caption labels bold.
30641 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30643 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30647 \begin_layout Standard
30648 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30650 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30652 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30664 \begin_layout Standard
30665 As result you find that the package
30670 \begin_inset Index idx
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30675 -packages ! caption
30681 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30686 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30690 \begin_inset space ~
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30703 usepackage[options]{package name}
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30707 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30708 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30709 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30710 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30713 \begin_layout Standard
30714 In your case the package name is
30719 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30724 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30725 So you add the command
30728 \begin_layout Standard
30733 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30737 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30742 For more commands provided by the
30746 package, have a look at its documentation,
30747 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30761 \begin_layout Standard
30762 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30764 For example if you use a
30768 class, you don't need the package
30772 , you can instead write
30775 \begin_layout Standard
30780 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30785 \begin_layout Standard
30786 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30787 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30788 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30795 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30798 \begin_layout Standard
30799 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30800 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30802 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30803 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30804 Code box as described in the previous
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30809 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30810 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30813 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30815 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30822 \begin_layout Standard
30823 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30829 \begin_layout Standard
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30843 \begin_inset Note Note
30846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30847 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30855 \begin_layout Left Header
30856 \begin_inset Argument 1
30859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30879 \begin_inset Note Note
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30883 defines the header line as described below
30891 \begin_layout Center Header
30892 \begin_inset Argument 1
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30904 \begin_layout Right Header
30905 \begin_inset Argument 1
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 \begin_layout Left Footer
30930 \begin_inset Argument 1
30933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 \begin_layout Center Footer
30955 \begin_inset Argument 1
30958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 \begin_inset Newline newline
30974 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30980 \begin_layout Right Footer
30981 \begin_inset Argument 1
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 \begin_layout Section
31007 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31010 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31015 \begin_inset Index idx
31018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31019 Document ! Header/Footer line
31025 \begin_inset Index idx
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31037 \begin_layout Standard
31038 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31042 \begin_inset space ~
31053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31059 \begin_inset space ~
31065 As a second step add in the menu
31067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31068 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31077 Custom Header/Footerlines
31080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31084 This module offers the following 6
31085 \begin_inset space ~
31091 \begin_layout Description
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31097 \begin_inset space ~
31101 \begin_inset space ~
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31115 \begin_layout Description
31117 \begin_inset space ~
31121 \begin_inset space ~
31125 \begin_inset space ~
31129 \begin_inset space ~
31133 \begin_inset space ~
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31141 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31146 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31148 \begin_inset space ~
31152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31154 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31158 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31161 \begin_layout Standard
31162 \begin_inset Float figure
31168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31171 \begin_inset Tabular
31172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31174 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31176 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31178 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31196 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31236 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31240 The normal text on the page goes here.
31241 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31243 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31244 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31249 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31258 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31334 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31339 name "fig:Page-layout"
31343 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31365 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31374 is set to “Default”.
31375 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31384 \begin_layout Subsection
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31390 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31391 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31392 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31394 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31396 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31399 \begin_layout Standard
31400 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31401 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31407 \begin_inset space ~
31415 \begin_layout Description
31418 thepage prints the current page number
31421 \begin_layout Description
31424 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31427 \begin_layout Description
31430 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31433 \begin_layout Description
31436 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31437 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31444 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31447 because it usually goes in a left header.
31450 \begin_layout Description
31453 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31454 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31456 It is normally used in the right header.
31459 \begin_layout Subsection
31460 Default header/footer
31463 \begin_layout Standard
31464 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31465 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31466 footer has the page number.
31467 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31468 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31469 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31480 \begin_layout Subsection
31484 \begin_layout Standard
31485 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31486 Some pages are different.
31487 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31488 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31489 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31490 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31491 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31495 Header and footer decoration line
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31499 By default, you get a 0.4
31500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31503 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31504 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31516 in the following way:
31519 \begin_layout Standard
31526 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31529 \begin_layout Standard
31530 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31543 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31550 \begin_layout Standard
31551 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31553 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31554 \begin_inset space ~
31558 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31568 Several header/footer lines
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31572 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31573 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31574 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31576 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31594 \begin_inset space ~
31602 \begin_layout Standard
31609 headheight}{height}
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31617 is a size in standard units (e.
31618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31622 \begin_inset space \space{}
31630 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31631 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31632 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31633 logfile with the menu
31635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31637 \begin_inset space ~
31645 \begin_inset space ~
31650 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31655 \begin_inset Index idx
31658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31660 -packages ! fancyhdr
31666 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31667 for your header/footer.
31670 \begin_layout Subsection
31674 \begin_layout Standard
31675 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31676 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31677 This example consists of the following definition:
31680 \begin_layout Description
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31691 , empty optional argument
31694 \begin_layout Description
31696 \begin_inset space ~
31699 Header empty, empty optional argument
31702 \begin_layout Description
31704 \begin_inset space ~
31713 in the optional argument
31716 \begin_layout Description
31718 \begin_inset space ~
31727 in the optional argument
31730 \begin_layout Description
31732 \begin_inset space ~
31745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31749 \begin_inset Newline newline
31753 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31760 in the optional argument
31763 \begin_layout Description
31765 \begin_inset space ~
31774 , empty optional argument
31777 \begin_layout Description
31780 headrulewidth set to 2
31781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31787 \begin_layout Standard
31788 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31789 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31804 \begin_layout Standard
31805 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31819 pagestyle{headings}
31825 \begin_inset Note Note
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31829 switches back to page style with the default headings
31837 \begin_layout Section
31838 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31841 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31846 \begin_inset Index idx
31849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31856 \begin_inset Index idx
31859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31868 \begin_layout Standard
31870 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31871 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31872 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31875 \begin_layout Subsection
31879 \begin_layout Standard
31880 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31886 \begin_inset Index idx
31889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31891 -packages ! preview-latex
31896 (on some systems named simply
31901 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31909 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31911 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31919 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31920 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31921 -package are automatically
31922 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31926 \begin_layout Subsection
31930 \begin_layout Standard
31931 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31932 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31934 activate the option
31937 \begin_inset space ~
31944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31950 \begin_inset space ~
31954 \begin_inset space ~
31957 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31964 \begin_inset space ~
31977 \begin_inset space ~
31982 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31985 \begin_layout Standard
31986 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 \begin_inset space ~
31999 \begin_inset space ~
32007 \begin_layout Standard
32008 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32009 and when you finish
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32023 generated by activating the option
32026 \begin_inset space ~
32032 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32040 \begin_layout Subsection
32041 Selected document parts
32044 \begin_layout Standard
32045 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32046 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32047 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32048 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32050 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32056 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32057 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32058 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32062 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32069 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32081 is explained in section
32083 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32088 \begin_inset space ~
32098 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32099 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32100 the final rotated boxes,
32101 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32102 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32104 Here is the result:
32107 \begin_layout Standard
32108 \begin_inset Preview
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32119 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32125 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32135 height_special "totalheight"
32140 backgroundcolor "none"
32143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32168 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32174 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32196 \begin_layout Standard
32197 Previewing works also for colors.
32198 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 is explained in section
32224 \begin_inset space ~
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32238 \begin_inset Preview
32240 \begin_layout Standard
32244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32263 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32268 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32287 \begin_layout Standard
32288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32294 \begin_layout Standard
32295 If \SpecialChar LyX
32296 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32297 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32298 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32299 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32300 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32301 the \SpecialChar TeX
32303 If \SpecialChar LyX
32304 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32305 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32307 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32308 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32309 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32312 \begin_layout Subsection
32317 \begin_layout Standard
32318 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32319 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32322 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32324 \begin_inset space ~
32329 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32331 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32333 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32334 's main window, then only this selection
32335 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32336 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32337 the source view window.
32342 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32343 ; but note that if you have
32344 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32346 not just the one which is open at the time.
32349 \begin_layout Section
32350 Advanced Find and Replace
32351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32353 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32358 \begin_inset Index idx
32361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32368 \begin_inset Index idx
32371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32380 \begin_layout Subsection
32384 \begin_layout Standard
32385 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32386 allows for searching of complex,
32387 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32389 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32390 The key-features are:
32393 \begin_layout Itemize
32394 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32395 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32396 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32400 \begin_layout Itemize
32401 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32402 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32403 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32404 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32407 \begin_layout Itemize
32408 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32409 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32410 outside of mathematics environments
32413 \begin_layout Itemize
32414 Search may be widened to a specific
32419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32423 \begin_inset space ~
32426 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32427 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32434 \begin_layout Itemize
32435 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32436 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32441 \begin_inset space ~
32444 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32447 \begin_layout Subsection
32451 \begin_layout Standard
32452 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32467 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32470 ) or the toolbar button
32473 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32479 Advanced Find and Replace
32484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32488 \begin_layout Standard
32494 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32503 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32506 arg "paragraph-break"
32510 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32511 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32515 arg "paragraph-break"
32518 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32522 searches backwards.
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32529 \begin_inset space ~
32534 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32543 \begin_inset space ~
32548 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32552 Searching for mathematics
32555 \begin_layout Standard
32556 Mathematical formulas, such as
32557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32560 or something more complex like
32561 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32564 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32569 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32570 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32571 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32572 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32583 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32584 This is done by switching to the
32588 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32593 This way, entering in the
32600 \begin_layout Itemize
32601 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32602 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32605 \begin_layout Itemize
32606 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32607 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32610 \begin_layout Itemize
32611 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32612 of it only within section headings.
32613 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32614 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32618 \begin_layout Itemize
32619 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32620 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32627 \begin_layout Standard
32628 The entries made in the
32632 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32641 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32645 button or alternatively press
32648 arg "paragraph-break"
32655 while the cursor is in the
32658 \begin_inset space ~
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32669 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32673 \begin_layout Itemize
32674 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32675 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32683 with its typewriter version
32684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32698 \begin_layout Itemize
32699 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32705 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32724 (you may want to enable the
32727 \begin_inset space ~
32735 \begin_inset space ~
32740 options and disable the
32748 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32756 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32757 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32761 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32764 , or occurrences of
32765 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32769 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32775 \begin_layout Subsection
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32780 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32785 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32789 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32798 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32804 This is done with the context menu
32806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32807 Insert Regular Expression
32809 while the cursor is in the
32814 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32815 expression matching rules
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32830 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32831 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32837 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32838 same text in the document.
32839 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32840 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32843 \begin_layout Enumerate
32844 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32849 editor the fraction
32850 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32854 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32857 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32858 fractions with the given denominator.
32861 \begin_layout Enumerate
32862 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32874 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32879 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32880 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32881 Also, by inserting a
32882 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32885 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32886 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32890 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32891 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32892 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32895 , and referring back to them through
32896 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32900 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32904 For example, try searching with the regexp
32905 \begin_inset Newline newline
32908 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32911 \begin_inset Newline newline
32914 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32918 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32931 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32932 sub-expressions is absolute.
32934 \begin_inset space ~
32938 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32941 always refers to the first occurrence of
32942 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32945 in all entered regexps.
32953 \begin_layout Section
32955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32957 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32962 \begin_inset Index idx
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32976 has a built-in spell checker.
32979 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32986 key or the toolbar button
32989 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32992 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32993 beginning of the currently selected text.
32994 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32995 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32996 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32997 scrolled so that it is visible.
32998 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32999 n, if any could be found.
33000 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33004 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33005 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33008 \begin_layout Standard
33009 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33016 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33017 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33019 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33020 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33031 arg "dialog-show character"
33034 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33036 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33039 \begin_layout Standard
33040 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33041 can be downloaded from here:
33042 \begin_inset Newline newline
33046 \begin_inset Flex URL
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33051 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33057 \begin_inset Newline newline
33061 \begin_inset space ~
33064 files for each language.
33065 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33066 \begin_inset space ~
33069 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33070 's installation subfolder
33078 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33080 \begin_inset Newline newline
33083 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33084 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33085 but in most cases these are
33101 is the language code.
33104 \begin_layout Subsection
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33117 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33120 you can set the following things:
33123 \begin_layout Description
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33128 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33129 should use for spell checking.
33130 Depending on your platform,
33144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33145 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33146 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33161 \begin_inset space ~
33164 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33167 \begin_layout Description
33169 \begin_inset space ~
33172 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33173 will always use the given language
33174 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33177 \begin_layout Description
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33182 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33188 \begin_inset space \space{}
33192 This should normally not be needed.
33195 \begin_layout Description
33197 \begin_inset space ~
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33204 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33216 \begin_layout Description
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33221 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33222 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33223 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33224 appear in a context menu.
33225 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33229 \begin_layout Description
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33242 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33246 \begin_layout Section
33248 \begin_inset Index idx
33251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33260 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33269 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33270 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33280 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33282 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33291 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33293 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33294 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33295 which are available for many languages.
33298 \begin_layout Standard
33299 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33300 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33304 \begin_layout Subsection
33305 Setting up the thesaurus
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33317 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33321 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33326 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33332 \begin_inset space ~
33340 For instance, the US English files are named:
33343 \begin_layout Itemize
33347 \begin_layout Itemize
33351 \begin_layout Standard
33360 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33361 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33364 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33365 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33366 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33368 \begin_inset space ~
33373 ) to the path where they are installed.
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33379 ies, typical locations are
33385 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33389 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33393 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33396 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33402 LibreOffice-<Version>
33409 On the Mac, the default location is
33411 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33412 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33413 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33414 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33415 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33416 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33424 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33425 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33426 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33430 \begin_layout Standard
33431 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33432 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33436 \begin_layout Itemize
33437 \begin_inset Flex URL
33440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33442 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33452 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33455 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33458 \begin_inset space ~
33463 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33465 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33466 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33470 \begin_layout Standard
33471 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33473 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33476 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33482 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33485 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33486 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33495 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33496 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33503 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33506 \begin_layout Subsection
33507 Using the thesaurus
33510 \begin_layout Standard
33511 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33513 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33516 or the toolbar button
33519 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33522 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33524 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33526 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33527 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33528 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33537 ), related terms (such as
33540 \begin_inset space ~
33549 ), compounds (such as
33552 \begin_inset space ~
33561 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33570 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33573 \begin_layout Standard
33574 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33575 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33579 \begin_layout Standard
33580 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33581 the dictionary, such as the above
33585 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33590 \begin_inset space \space{}
33593 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33594 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33595 For example, looking up the word form
33599 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33604 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33609 \begin_inset space \space{}
33620 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33621 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33622 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33625 \begin_layout Section
33627 \begin_inset Index idx
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 \begin_inset Index idx
33640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33641 Document ! Change Tracking
33647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33649 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33658 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33659 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33660 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33667 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33678 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33692 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33693 You can change the color in
33695 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33696 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33698 \begin_inset space ~
33702 \begin_inset space ~
33707 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33713 \begin_inset Index idx
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 Color ! Change tracking
33722 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33723 's status bar when the
33724 cursor is in changed text.
33725 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33728 arg "changes-merge"
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33737 \begin_inset Index idx
33740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 \begin_layout Standard
33750 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33756 \begin_layout Standard
33757 \begin_inset Graphics
33758 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33766 \begin_layout Standard
33767 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33777 \begin_layout Standard
33778 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33784 \begin_layout Standard
33785 \begin_inset Tabular
33786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33787 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33799 arg "changes-track"
33807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33815 \begin_inset space ~
33818 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33820 \begin_inset space ~
33829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33838 arg "changes-output"
33846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33857 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_inset space ~
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33897 Jumps to the next change
33903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 arg "change-accept"
33920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33928 \begin_inset space ~
33931 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33933 \begin_inset space ~
33942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 arg "change-reject"
33959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33967 \begin_inset space ~
33970 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33990 arg "changes-merge"
33998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34009 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 arg "all-changes-accept"
34037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34048 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34072 arg "all-changes-reject"
34080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34091 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34097 \begin_inset space ~
34106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34130 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34164 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34166 \begin_inset space ~
34182 \begin_layout Standard
34183 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34190 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34211 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34212 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34213 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34214 the next change after the current cursor position.
34215 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34216 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34217 step to the next change.
34218 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34223 to describe a change.
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34227 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34233 \begin_inset Index idx
34236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34238 -packages ! dvipost
34244 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34252 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34256 \begin_layout Section
34257 Comparison of Documents
34258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34260 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34265 \begin_inset Index idx
34268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34269 Comparison of documents
34277 \begin_layout Standard
34278 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34285 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34286 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34288 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34290 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34294 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_inset space ~
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34319 \begin_inset space ~
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34327 \begin_inset space ~
34331 \begin_inset space ~
34336 enables the change tracking option
34339 \begin_inset space ~
34343 \begin_inset space ~
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34352 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34355 \begin_layout Section
34356 International Support
34357 \begin_inset Index idx
34360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34361 International support
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34371 with any language you want.
34372 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34373 up \SpecialChar LyX
34375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34377 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34386 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34393 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34400 \begin_layout Subsection
34402 \begin_inset Index idx
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 \begin_inset Index idx
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34416 Document ! Settings
34422 \begin_inset Index idx
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34426 Document ! Language
34434 \begin_layout Standard
34437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34441 dialog lets you set
34443 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34448 \begin_layout Standard
34453 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34463 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34464 For details about the different encoding options see section
34465 \begin_inset space ~
34469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34471 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34478 \begin_layout Subsection
34479 Keyboard mapping configuration
34480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34482 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34489 \begin_layout Standard
34490 If you have for example a U.
34491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34494 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34495 can use an alternate keymap.
34496 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34501 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34502 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34506 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34513 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34518 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34519 which one you want to use.
34522 \begin_layout Standard
34523 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34524 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34525 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34529 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34530 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34531 one to support the characters you want.
34532 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34539 \begin_layout Chapter
34542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34544 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34553 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34554 topic inside the user's guide.
34557 \begin_layout Section
34559 \begin_inset Index idx
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34576 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34579 \begin_layout Subsection
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 Creates a new document.
34587 \begin_layout Subsection
34591 \begin_layout Standard
34592 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34593 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34594 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34597 \begin_layout Subsection
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34605 \begin_layout Subsection
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34611 Click there on a file to open it.
34614 \begin_layout Subsection
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 Closes the current document.
34622 \begin_layout Subsection
34626 \begin_layout Standard
34627 Closes all opened documents.
34630 \begin_layout Subsection
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 Saves the actual document.
34638 \begin_layout Subsection
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34646 \begin_layout Subsection
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34651 Saves all opened documents.
34654 \begin_layout Subsection
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34662 \begin_layout Subsection
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34667 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34668 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34669 It is described in the section
34671 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34676 Additional Features
34681 \begin_layout Subsection
34685 \begin_layout Standard
34686 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34687 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34689 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34690 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 When using the menu entry
34698 \begin_inset space ~
34703 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34711 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34720 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34721 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34724 \begin_layout Subsection
34726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34728 name "subsec:Export"
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 You can export your document to various file formats.
34737 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34739 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34740 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34741 during its configuration.
34744 \begin_layout Standard
34745 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34753 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34760 \begin_layout Description
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34769 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34771 \begin_inset space ~
34774 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34775 \begin_inset Newline newline
34778 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34779 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34783 \begin_layout Description
34784 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34790 \begin_layout Description
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34795 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34801 \begin_layout Description
34802 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34803 's native DVI-format.
34804 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34805 files paths or file names in your document.
34807 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34814 \begin_layout Description
34815 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34816 in files paths or file names
34819 \begin_layout Description
34821 \begin_inset space ~
34828 ) DVI-format using the program
34830 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34833 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34845 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34853 \begin_layout Description
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34858 (cropped) the same as
34862 but with cropped page margins.
34865 \begin_layout Description
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34870 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34874 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34879 \begin_layout Description
34883 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34891 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34899 \begin_layout Description
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34908 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34912 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34920 \begin_layout Description
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34933 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34934 source that is compilable with the program
34936 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34940 \begin_layout Description
34944 \begin_inset space ~
34949 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34950 source, additionally all images used in the document
34951 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34955 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34958 \begin_layout Description
34962 \begin_inset space ~
34967 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34968 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34969 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34977 \begin_layout Description
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34990 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34991 source that is compilable with the program
34997 \begin_layout Description
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35010 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35011 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35017 \begin_layout Description
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35022 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35023 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35029 \begin_inset space \space{}
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35053 represent the version number)
35056 \begin_layout Description
35058 \begin_inset space ~
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35065 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35066 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35067 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35071 \begin_layout Description
35072 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35073 's internal XHTML engine
35076 \begin_layout Description
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset space ~
35086 \begin_inset space ~
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35093 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35098 For the conversion the program
35107 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35110 \begin_layout Description
35111 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35116 \begin_layout Description
35118 \begin_inset space ~
35121 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35123 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35126 For the conversion the program
35135 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35138 \begin_layout Description
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35143 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35144 For the conversion the program
35153 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35156 \begin_layout Description
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35161 (cropped) the same as
35164 \begin_inset space ~
35169 but with cropped page margins
35172 \begin_layout Description
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35181 PDF-format using the program
35185 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35188 \begin_layout Description
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35196 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35209 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35214 \begin_inset space \space{}
35217 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35221 \begin_layout Description
35225 \begin_inset space ~
35230 PDF-format using the program
35232 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35235 , produces PDF-files directly
35238 \begin_layout Description
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35247 PDF-format using the program
35251 , produces PDF-files directly
35254 \begin_layout Description
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35263 PDF-format using the program
35267 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35270 \begin_layout Description
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35279 PDF-format using the program
35284 , produces PDF-files directly
35287 \begin_layout Description
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35299 \begin_layout Description
35303 \begin_inset space ~
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35312 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35313 and then exported as text using the program
35318 \begin_layout Description
35323 PostScript format using the program
35331 options see section
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35338 reference "subsec:General-output"
35345 \begin_layout Description
35346 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35347 source and also code in the statistical programming
35361 it is possible to use
35365 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35369 \begin_layout Standard
35370 If one of the menu entries
35377 \begin_inset space ~
35386 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35388 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35396 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35401 \begin_inset Index idx
35404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35405 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35414 \begin_layout Subsection
35418 \begin_layout Standard
35419 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35420 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35423 \begin_inset space ~
35427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35429 reference "sec:Paths"
35434 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35443 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35444 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35445 's preferences as described in section
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35452 reference "subsec:Converters"
35459 \begin_layout Subsection
35460 New and Close Window
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35468 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35476 \begin_layout Section
35478 \begin_inset Index idx
35481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35490 \begin_layout Subsection
35494 \begin_layout Standard
35495 Described in section
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35502 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35509 \begin_layout Subsection
35510 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35514 Described in section
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35521 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35533 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35534 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35537 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 Selects the whole document.
35545 \begin_layout Subsection
35546 Find & Replace (Quick)
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 Described in section
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35557 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35564 \begin_layout Subsection
35565 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 Described in section
35570 \begin_inset space ~
35574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35576 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35583 \begin_layout Subsection
35584 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35592 \begin_layout Subsection
35596 \begin_layout Standard
35597 Described in section
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35604 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35611 \begin_layout Subsection
35613 \begin_inset Index idx
35616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35617 Paragraph ! Settings
35625 \begin_layout Standard
35626 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35627 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35632 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35633 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35651 Table and Rows & Columns
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35656 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35657 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35660 \begin_layout Subsection
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35666 It will dissolve this inset.
35667 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35677 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35680 \begin_layout Subsection
35681 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35687 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35694 reference "sec:Nesting"
35699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35701 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35708 \begin_layout Subsection
35711 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35714 \begin_layout Standard
35715 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35716 nts of the same type.
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35724 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35728 for an explanation.
35731 \begin_layout Section
35733 \begin_inset Index idx
35736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35745 \begin_layout Standard
35746 At the bottom of the
35750 menu the opened documents are listed.
35753 \begin_layout Subsection
35754 Open/Close all Insets
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35758 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35762 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 Math macros are described in the
35777 \begin_layout Subsection
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35789 reference "sec:Navigating"
35794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35796 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35803 \begin_layout Subsection
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35808 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35816 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35823 \begin_layout Subsection
35827 \begin_layout Standard
35828 Opens a window showing console messages.
35829 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35834 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35835 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35836 is processing the document.
35839 \begin_layout Subsection
35841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35843 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35848 \begin_inset Index idx
35851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35862 All toolbars and the
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35870 can be turned on and off.
35875 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35904 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35908 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35920 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35924 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35925 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35926 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35927 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35928 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35931 \begin_layout Standard
35933 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35940 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35947 \begin_layout Subsection
35951 \begin_layout Standard
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35980 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35981 's main window vertically while
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_inset space ~
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35996 \begin_inset space ~
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36009 will split it horizontally.
36010 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36011 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36012 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36013 three or more documents at the same time.
36014 To close a split view, use the menu
36017 \begin_inset space ~
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36029 \begin_layout Subsection
36033 \begin_layout Standard
36034 Closes a split view.
36037 \begin_layout Subsection
36041 \begin_layout Standard
36042 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36043 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36044 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36045 's main window fullscreen.
36046 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36047 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36050 \begin_layout Section
36052 \begin_inset Index idx
36055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36064 \begin_layout Subsection
36068 \begin_layout Standard
36069 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36070 \begin_inset space ~
36074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36076 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36087 \begin_layout Subsection
36089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36091 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36098 \begin_layout Standard
36099 Here you can insert the following characters:
36102 \begin_layout Description
36107 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36110 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36111 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36112 -packages you have installed.
36113 You can get a complete display by checking
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36122 \begin_inset Newline newline
36126 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36134 Not all characters will be visible in the
36138 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36139 dialog (see section
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36146 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36150 ) can display every character.
36158 \begin_layout Description
36159 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36163 \begin_layout Description
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36172 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36179 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36186 \begin_layout Description
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36191 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36195 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36201 \begin_layout Description
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36206 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36210 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36216 \begin_layout Description
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36221 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36225 \begin_layout Description
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36234 \begin_layout Description
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36239 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36245 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36251 \begin_layout Description
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36256 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36266 \begin_inset Index idx
36269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36276 \begin_inset Index idx
36279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36280 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36285 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36286 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36288 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36294 \begin_inset Index idx
36297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36305 \begin_inset Newline newline
36308 More information about this feature can be found in the
36314 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36320 \begin_layout Description
36321 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36323 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36324 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36328 \begin_layout Subsection
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36336 \begin_layout Description
36337 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36338 \begin_inset script superscript
36340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 \begin_layout Description
36350 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36351 \begin_inset script subscript
36353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 \begin_layout Description
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36367 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36374 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36381 \begin_layout Description
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36386 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36393 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36400 \begin_layout Description
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36405 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36412 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36419 \begin_layout Description
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36424 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36430 \begin_inset space \space{}
36433 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36434 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36443 To insert a fraction use the command
36448 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36452 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36461 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36468 \begin_layout Description
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36473 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36480 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36487 \begin_layout Description
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36492 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36499 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36506 \begin_layout Description
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36511 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36518 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36525 \begin_layout Description
36526 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36533 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36540 \begin_layout Description
36542 \begin_inset space ~
36545 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36559 \begin_layout Description
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36564 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36578 \begin_layout Description
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36587 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36594 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36601 \begin_layout Description
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36606 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36607 as described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36621 \begin_layout Description
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36626 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36633 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36640 \begin_layout Description
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36645 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36646 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36661 \begin_layout Description
36663 \begin_inset space ~
36666 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36673 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36680 \begin_layout Description
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset space ~
36689 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36696 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36703 \begin_layout Subsection
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36733 are described in section
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36740 reference "sec:toc"
36749 is described in section
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36756 reference "sec:Index"
36764 is described in section
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36771 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36777 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36780 is described in section
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36787 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 To insert floats, as described in section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "sec:Floats"
36810 and in detail the chapter
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36825 \begin_layout Subsection
36829 \begin_layout Standard
36830 To insert notes, described in section
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36837 reference "sec:Notes"
36844 \begin_layout Subsection
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36851 Branches are described in section
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36858 reference "sec:Branches"
36865 \begin_layout Subsection
36869 \begin_layout Standard
36870 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36871 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36873 An example is the document class
36874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36881 with three custom insets.
36884 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36888 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36894 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36899 \begin_inset Index idx
36902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36912 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36914 For more information see chapter
36916 External Document Parts
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36925 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_inset Index idx
36930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36940 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36941 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36956 \begin_layout Subsection
36960 \begin_layout Standard
36965 dialog as described in section
36966 \begin_inset space ~
36970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36972 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36979 \begin_layout Subsection
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36988 as described in section
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36995 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37002 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37011 as described in section
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37018 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37025 \begin_layout Subsection
37027 \begin_inset Index idx
37030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37037 \begin_inset Index idx
37040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37041 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37051 Floats are described in section
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37058 reference "sec:Floats"
37062 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37064 Multi-page Captions
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37089 reference "sec:Index"
37096 \begin_layout Subsection
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37108 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37115 \begin_layout Subsection
37119 \begin_layout Standard
37120 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37121 Tables are described in section
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37128 reference "sec:Tables"
37132 and in detail in the chapter
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37147 \begin_layout Subsection
37151 \begin_layout Standard
37157 Graphics are described in section
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37164 reference "sec:Graphics"
37171 \begin_layout Subsection
37175 \begin_layout Standard
37176 Inserts a URL as described in section
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37183 reference "subsec:URLs"
37190 \begin_layout Subsection
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37195 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37202 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37209 \begin_layout Subsection
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37221 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37228 \begin_layout Subsection
37232 \begin_layout Standard
37233 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37240 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37247 \begin_layout Subsection
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37253 title or caption of a float.
37254 Inserts a short title as described in section
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37261 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37268 \begin_layout Subsection
37273 \begin_layout Standard
37274 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37275 Code box as described in section
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37282 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37289 \begin_layout Subsection
37291 \begin_inset Index idx
37294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37304 Inserts a program listings box.
37305 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37307 Program Code Listings
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37320 \begin_layout Subsection
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 Inserts the actual date.
37326 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37330 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37346 \begin_layout Subsection
37350 \begin_layout Standard
37351 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37352 \begin_inset space ~
37356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37358 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37365 \begin_layout Section
37367 \begin_inset Index idx
37370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37379 \begin_layout Standard
37380 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37384 of the current document.
37385 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37388 \begin_layout Subsection
37392 \begin_layout Standard
37393 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37394 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37395 to jump, for example, between section
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37400 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37404 2.5 and use the submenu
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37424 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37434 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37438 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37444 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37447 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37450 \begin_layout Standard
37451 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37460 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37468 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37471 \begin_layout Subsection
37472 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37484 \begin_layout Standard
37485 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37486 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37487 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_layout Subsection
37507 \begin_layout Standard
37508 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37511 The \SpecialChar LyX
37512 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37527 manual for a detailed description.
37530 \begin_layout Section
37532 \begin_inset Index idx
37535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37544 \begin_layout Subsection
37548 \begin_layout Standard
37549 Change Tracking is described in section
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37556 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37563 \begin_layout Subsection
37571 \begin_layout Standard
37572 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37573 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37574 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37576 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37577 to the clipboard or update the view.
37578 \begin_inset Newline newline
37581 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37585 \begin_layout Standard
37588 Open Containing Directory
37590 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37591 's temporary folder for the document.
37592 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37593 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37594 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37595 For example some journals require to send the
37599 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37603 \begin_layout Subsection
37604 Start Appendix Here
37607 \begin_layout Standard
37608 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37609 as described in section
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37616 reference "sec:Appendices"
37623 \begin_layout Subsection
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_layout Standard
37632 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37633 default output format for the document (menu
37635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37636 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37637 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37655 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37659 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37662 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37663 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37668 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37673 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37675 \begin_inset space ~
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37691 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37695 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37696 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37698 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37699 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37704 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37709 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37719 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37724 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37725 when it is first configured.
37726 The default output format is
37729 \begin_inset space ~
37737 \begin_layout Subsection
37738 View (Other Formats)
37741 \begin_layout Standard
37742 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37743 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37744 actual document with an external program.
37745 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37746 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37747 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37749 All possible formats are listed in section
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37756 reference "subsec:Export"
37761 You should at least see the menu entry
37766 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37768 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37776 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37781 \begin_inset Index idx
37784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37785 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37794 \begin_layout Standard
37795 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37796 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37798 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37799 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37804 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37806 \begin_inset space ~
37809 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37819 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37824 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37825 when it is first configured.
37828 \begin_layout Subsection
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37836 \begin_layout Standard
37837 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37838 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 Update (Other Formats)
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37847 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37850 \begin_layout Subsection
37851 View Master Document
37854 \begin_layout Standard
37855 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37871 \begin_inset space ~
37876 manual for more information on this topic).
37877 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37878 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37882 \begin_inset space ~
37886 \begin_inset space ~
37891 generates the output of the whole book, while
37895 will just output the chapter alone.
37898 \begin_layout Standard
37899 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37900 in the document settings (menu
37902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37904 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37922 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37926 ) or in the preferences (menu
37928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37929 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37931 \begin_inset space ~
37934 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37939 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37941 \begin_inset space ~
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37951 \begin_inset space ~
37955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37957 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37964 \begin_layout Subsection
37965 Update Master Document
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37990 manual for more information on this topic).
37991 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37992 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37995 \begin_layout Standard
37996 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37997 in the document settings (menu
37999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38000 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38001 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38003 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38013 \begin_inset space ~
38017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38019 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38023 ) or in the preferences (menu
38025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38026 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38031 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38036 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38038 \begin_inset space ~
38042 \begin_inset space ~
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38054 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38061 \begin_layout Subsection
38063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38065 name "subsec:Compressed"
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38073 Un/compresses the current document.
38074 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38075 compression (see the
38077 Additional Features
38079 manual for details).
38082 \begin_layout Subsection
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38087 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38090 \begin_layout Subsection
38094 \begin_layout Standard
38095 The document settings are described in appendix
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38102 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38109 \begin_layout Section
38111 \begin_inset Index idx
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 \begin_layout Subsection
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 Spell checking is explained in section
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38135 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38142 \begin_layout Subsection
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 The thesaurus is described in section
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38154 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38161 \begin_layout Subsection
38163 \begin_inset Index idx
38166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 \begin_inset Index idx
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38185 \begin_layout Standard
38186 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38187 the highlighted document part.
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38196 \begin_inset Index idx
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38200 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 Generates with the help of the program
38212 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38215 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38216 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38217 This feature is not available on Windows.
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38226 \begin_inset Index idx
38229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38245 \begin_inset space ~
38250 to see the full filename paths.
38253 \begin_layout Subsection
38255 \begin_inset Index idx
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38269 files as described in section
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38276 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38283 \begin_layout Subsection
38285 \begin_inset Index idx
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38319 \begin_inset Index idx
38322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38332 \begin_layout Standard
38333 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38334 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38335 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38336 -packages and programs it needs; see
38338 \begin_inset space ~
38342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38344 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38351 \begin_layout Subsection
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38360 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38367 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38374 \begin_layout Section
38376 \begin_inset Index idx
38379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38389 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38390 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38392 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38396 \begin_layout Standard
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38405 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38406 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38407 packages and classes found
38408 by \SpecialChar LyX
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38416 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38423 \begin_layout Standard
38427 \begin_inset space ~
38432 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38437 \begin_layout Section
38439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38441 name "sec:Toolbars"
38448 \begin_layout Standard
38449 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38450 \begin_inset space ~
38454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38456 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38463 \begin_layout Standard
38464 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38465 This is described in the
38467 Additional Features
38472 \begin_layout Subsection
38474 \begin_inset Index idx
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 \begin_layout Standard
38487 \begin_inset Graphics
38488 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38503 \begin_layout Standard
38504 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38521 \begin_inset Note Note
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38530 manual for more information.
38538 \begin_layout Standard
38539 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38545 \begin_layout Standard
38546 \begin_inset Tabular
38547 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38548 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38549 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38556 \begin_inset Graphics
38557 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38571 pull-down box for the environments
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38585 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38591 \begin_layout Standard
38593 \begin_inset Tabular
38594 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38595 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38596 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38597 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38621 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38711 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 arg "spelling-continuously"
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 Spellcheck continuously
38745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38798 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38904 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39000 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39001 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39029 Emphasize text, function of the
39031 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39036 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 Set text to noun style, function of the
39068 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39073 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39091 arg "textstyle-apply"
39099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 Format text using the current settings in the
39105 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39110 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39143 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 arg "tabular-insert"
39199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 Toggle outline window on/off,
39235 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39263 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39278 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39290 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39303 \begin_layout Subsection
39305 \begin_inset Index idx
39308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39317 \begin_layout Standard
39318 \begin_inset Graphics
39319 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39327 \begin_layout Standard
39328 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39340 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39346 \begin_layout Standard
39347 \begin_inset Tabular
39348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39349 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 arg "layout Enumerate"
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39415 arg "layout Itemize"
39423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 arg "layout Description"
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 arg "depth-increment"
39504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 arg "depth-decrement"
39542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39572 arg "float-insert figure"
39580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39587 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39603 arg "float-insert table"
39611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39618 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39740 \begin_inset space ~
39749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39758 arg "nomencl-insert"
39766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39774 \begin_inset space ~
39783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39792 arg "footnote-insert"
39800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39822 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39871 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39985 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40000 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40016 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40031 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40051 arg "dialog-show character"
40059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40065 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40070 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 arg "layout-paragraph"
40094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40134 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40148 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 View/Update Toolbar
40150 \begin_inset Index idx
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40154 Toolbar ! View / Update
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 \begin_inset Graphics
40164 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40171 \begin_layout Standard
40172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40183 \begin_layout Standard
40184 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40191 \begin_inset Tabular
40192 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40193 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40194 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40195 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 arg "buffer-update"
40243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40256 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40265 arg "master-buffer-view"
40273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40299 arg "master-buffer-update"
40307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40315 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40353 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40354 Synchronize with Output
40360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40384 View (Other Formats)
40390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40397 arg "update-others"
40405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40412 Update (Other Formats)
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40430 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 \begin_layout Standard
40435 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40442 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40446 , the table toolbar
40447 \begin_inset Index idx
40450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40464 manual and the math macro toolbar
40465 \begin_inset Index idx
40468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 \begin_layout Chapter
40482 The Document Settings
40483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40485 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40490 \begin_inset Index idx
40493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40494 Document ! Settings
40502 \begin_layout Standard
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40511 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40512 is called with the menu
40514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40518 You can save your document settings as default with the
40520 Save as Document Defaults
40522 button in any dialog.
40523 This will create a template named
40527 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40528 when you create a new document without
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40537 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40538 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40542 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40543 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40544 to find the one you are looking for.
40545 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40546 the submenus of the dialog.
40548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40552 \begin_inset space \space{}
40556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40563 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40564 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40565 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40568 \begin_layout Section
40572 \begin_layout Standard
40573 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40575 Document classes are described in section
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40590 \begin_layout Standard
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40599 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40604 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40605 as a layout for a document class.
40606 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40608 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40617 \begin_layout Standard
40618 Some classes use special class options by default.
40619 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40623 and you can decide to use them or not.
40624 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40625 recommended you leave them untouched.
40630 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40631 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40636 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40638 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40644 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40645 \begin_inset Newline newline
40650 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40653 \begin_inset Newline newline
40656 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40657 distribution, see section
40662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40664 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40681 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40682 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40683 in the background if the child document
40684 is opened without its master.
40685 This way child documents are always compilable.
40686 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40713 \begin_inset Index idx
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40718 -packages ! prettyref
40724 \begin_inset Index idx
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40729 -packages ! refstyle
40734 for cross-references, see section
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40741 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40748 \begin_layout Section
40752 \begin_layout Standard
40753 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40754 Please refer to the section
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40770 manual for details.
40773 \begin_layout Section
40777 \begin_layout Standard
40778 Modules are explained in section
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40785 reference "subsec:Modules"
40792 \begin_layout Section
40796 \begin_layout Standard
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40804 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40811 \begin_layout Section
40815 \begin_layout Standard
40816 The document font settings are described in section
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40823 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40830 \begin_layout Section
40834 \begin_layout Standard
40835 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40852 and whether it should be a
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40860 can also be specified here.
40863 \begin_layout Standard
40864 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40865 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40866 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40868 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40874 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40877 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40878 justifies the text on screen.
40879 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40883 \begin_layout Section
40887 \begin_layout Standard
40888 This dialog is described in sections
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40895 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40902 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40909 \begin_layout Section
40913 \begin_layout Standard
40914 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40921 reference "subsec:Margins"
40928 \begin_layout Section
40930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40932 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40937 \begin_inset Index idx
40940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40941 Language ! Encoding
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40951 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40952 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40954 is always encoded in utf8).
40955 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40956 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40957 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40958 -command is not known for
40959 a particular character).
40962 \begin_layout Standard
40963 If you use the option
40968 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40969 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40970 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40972 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40973 exactly one encoding.
40974 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40977 \begin_layout Standard
40979 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40980 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40981 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40982 installation supports Unicode), choose
40983 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40984 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40985 is quite incomplete, so
40986 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40991 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40992 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40993 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40994 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40995 -commands is not used, because all
40996 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40997 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40998 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40999 , two new alternative engines
41000 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41002 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41004 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41035 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41040 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41044 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41047 \begin_layout Standard
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41056 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41057 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41067 The possible settings are:
41070 \begin_layout Description
41071 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41073 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41074 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41084 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41091 \begin_layout Description
41092 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41093 format you will use.
41094 In many cases this will be
41099 \begin_inset Index idx
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41110 If the newer package
41115 \begin_inset Index idx
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 -packages ! polyglossia
41125 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41126 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41127 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41129 this package will be used instead of
41136 \begin_layout Description
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41149 would be more appropriate.
41152 \begin_layout Description
41153 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41154 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41158 (for German texts), type in
41161 \begin_inset Newline newline
41166 usepackage{ngerman}
41169 \begin_layout Description
41170 None will not use a language package.
41171 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41174 \begin_layout Standard
41175 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41178 \begin_layout Description
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41195 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41201 \begin_inset Index idx
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41206 -packages ! inputenc
41212 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41213 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41214 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41218 \begin_layout Description
41219 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41221 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41222 commands, which may result in a big
41223 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41224 -commands are needed.
41227 \begin_layout Description
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41239 \begin_layout Description
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41248 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41251 \begin_layout Description
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41259 \begin_layout Description
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41268 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41269 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41272 \begin_layout Description
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41281 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41294 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41295 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41298 \begin_layout Description
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41311 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_layout Description
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41331 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41332 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41335 \begin_layout Description
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41344 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41345 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41346 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41347 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41367 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41368 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41369 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41371 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41382 \begin_layout Description
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41391 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41394 \begin_layout Description
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41403 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41406 \begin_layout Description
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41412 \begin_inset space ~
41415 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41418 \begin_layout Description
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41423 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41426 \begin_layout Description
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41431 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41434 \begin_layout Description
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41443 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41446 \begin_layout Description
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41452 \begin_inset space ~
41458 \begin_layout Description
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41467 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41470 \begin_layout Description
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41482 \begin_layout Description
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41491 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41497 \begin_inset Index idx
41500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41507 , when using this, set the document language to
41512 \begin_layout Description
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41521 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41526 , when using this, set the document language to
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41535 \begin_layout Description
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41544 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41550 \begin_inset Index idx
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 -packages ! japanese
41560 , when using this, set the document language to
41565 \begin_layout Description
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41574 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41579 , when using this, set the document language to
41584 \begin_layout Description
41586 \begin_inset space ~
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41593 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41598 , when using this, set the document language to
41603 \begin_layout Description
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41608 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41611 \begin_layout Description
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41627 \begin_layout Description
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41640 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41641 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41642 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41645 \begin_layout Description
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41657 \begin_layout Description
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41666 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41667 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41670 \begin_layout Description
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41679 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41685 \begin_inset Index idx
41688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41698 \begin_layout Description
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41711 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41718 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41721 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41728 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41729 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41731 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41734 \begin_layout Description
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41743 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41749 \begin_inset Index idx
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41759 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41762 \begin_layout Description
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41767 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41773 \begin_inset Index idx
41776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 -packages ! inputenc
41784 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41788 \begin_layout Description
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41801 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41808 \begin_layout Description
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41821 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41822 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41823 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41827 \begin_layout Description
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41837 \begin_inset space ~
41840 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41841 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41844 \begin_layout Section
41846 \begin_inset Index idx
41849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 \begin_inset Index idx
41859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 \begin_inset Index idx
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41870 Color ! Shaded boxes
41876 \begin_inset Index idx
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 Here you can alter the font color for the
41893 (default: black), for
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41901 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41905 (default: white) and for
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41918 sets the color back to the default.
41921 \begin_layout Standard
41922 Clicking any button showing
41930 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41931 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41932 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41933 later more quickly.
41936 \begin_layout Standard
41937 Note, if you change the
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41945 font color and use the option
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41953 in the document settings under
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41961 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41968 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41982 \begin_layout Standard
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41995 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42001 Code after a forced page break:
42004 \begin_layout Itemize
42005 For the page color:
42006 \begin_inset Newline newline
42013 pagecolor{color name}
42016 \begin_layout Itemize
42017 For the text color:
42018 \begin_inset Newline newline
42028 \begin_layout Standard
42029 You are restricted to one of
42065 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42078 \begin_inset Newline newline
42081 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42082 names to refer to them:
42085 \begin_layout Itemize
42091 \begin_inset Newline newline
42096 page_backgroundcolor
42099 \begin_layout Itemize
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42109 \begin_inset Newline newline
42117 \begin_layout Itemize
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42127 \begin_inset Newline newline
42135 \begin_layout Itemize
42139 \begin_inset space ~
42145 \begin_inset Newline newline
42153 \begin_layout Standard
42154 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42165 \begin_inset space ~
42173 \begin_layout Section
42177 \begin_layout Standard
42178 Here you can adjust the
42182 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42186 as described in section
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42193 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42200 \begin_layout Section
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42205 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42211 \begin_inset Index idx
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42226 \begin_inset Index idx
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42231 -packages ! jurabib
42239 Sectioned bibliography
42241 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42247 \begin_inset Index idx
42250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42252 -packages ! bibtopic
42257 and you can select a
42261 for the generation of the bibliography.
42262 For a further description see section
42263 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42269 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42276 \begin_layout Section
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42281 Here you can define the
42285 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42287 \begin_inset space ~
42291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42293 reference "sec:Index"
42300 \begin_layout Section
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42305 The PDF properties are explained in section
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42312 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42319 \begin_layout Section
42323 \begin_layout Standard
42324 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42325 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42331 \begin_inset Index idx
42334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42336 -packages ! amsmath
42346 \begin_inset Index idx
42349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42351 -packages ! amssymb
42361 \begin_inset Index idx
42364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42376 \begin_inset Index idx
42379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 \begin_inset Index idx
42394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 -packages ! mathdots
42406 \begin_inset Index idx
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42411 -packages ! mathtools
42421 \begin_inset Index idx
42424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 \begin_inset Index idx
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 -packages ! stackrel
42451 \begin_inset Index idx
42454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42456 -packages ! stmaryrd
42466 \begin_inset Index idx
42469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 -packages ! undertilde
42476 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42479 \begin_layout Description
42480 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42481 -errors in formulas,
42482 ensure that you have this enabled.
42485 \begin_layout Description
42486 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42487 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42488 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42492 \begin_layout Description
42493 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42496 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_layout Description
42509 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42524 \begin_layout Description
42525 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42536 \begin_layout Description
42537 mathtools is used for the math commands
42573 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42580 \begin_layout Description
42581 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42583 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42592 \begin_layout Description
42593 stackrel is used for the math command
42610 \begin_layout Description
42611 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42614 \begin_layout Description
42615 undertilde is used for the math command
42623 Accents for one Character
42632 \begin_layout Section
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 The float placement options are described in the section
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42648 \begin_inset space ~
42656 \begin_layout Section
42660 \begin_layout Standard
42661 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42663 Program Code Listings
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42676 \begin_layout Section
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42681 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42689 set to be used and set the
42694 The itemize environment is described in section
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42701 reference "sec:Itemize"
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 You can furthermore specify a
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42717 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42718 command of the desired character.
42719 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42726 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42732 \begin_inset space \space{}
42736 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42746 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42747 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42759 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42760 -packages in the preamble (menu
42763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42767 \begin_inset space ~
42773 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42777 usepackage{textcomp}
42780 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42784 usepackage{amssymb}
42794 \begin_layout Section
42798 \begin_layout Standard
42799 Branches are described in section
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42806 reference "sec:Branches"
42813 \begin_layout Section
42815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42817 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42824 \begin_layout Standard
42825 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42828 \begin_layout Description
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42837 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42857 View Master Document
42858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42865 Update Master Document
42866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42873 menu or the toolbar.
42874 The default is set in
42876 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42877 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42882 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42892 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42899 \begin_layout Description
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42908 Output settings for the menu
42910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42918 For a detailed description see section
42920 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42933 \begin_layout Description
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42939 \begin_inset space ~
42942 Options offers settings for the export format
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42955 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42956 \begin_inset space ~
42959 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42968 settings are described in detail in section
42970 Math Output in XHTML
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42988 \begin_inset space ~
42993 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42996 \begin_layout Description
42998 \begin_inset space ~
43003 Save transient properties
43005 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
43006 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
43007 The properties that are affected by option are currently
43011 \begin_layout Itemize
43012 the activation of change tracking
43015 \begin_layout Itemize
43016 the output of tracked changes
43019 \begin_layout Itemize
43020 the recording of the document directory path.
43023 \begin_layout Standard
43024 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43025 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43029 \begin_layout Section
43037 \begin_layout Standard
43038 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43040 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43042 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43044 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43049 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43050 -syntax is given in section
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43057 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43064 \begin_layout Chapter
43070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43072 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43077 \begin_inset Index idx
43080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43089 \begin_layout Standard
43090 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43096 It has the following submenus.
43099 \begin_layout Section
43103 \begin_layout Subsection
43107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43108 User Interface File
43109 \begin_inset Index idx
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 Customization ! of toolbars
43119 \begin_inset Index idx
43122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43123 Customization ! of menus
43131 \begin_layout Standard
43132 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43133 interface (ui) file.
43134 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43142 \begin_layout Description
43147 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43150 \begin_layout Description
43157 the menu entries in popup context menus
43160 \begin_layout Description
43165 specifies the toolbar buttons
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43170 and edit the entries.
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43174 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43186 entries must be finished with an explicit
43211 and in the case of the
43212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43224 The syntax for the entries is:
43227 \begin_layout Standard
43228 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43259 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43262 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43263 -functions are listed in the menu
43265 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43267 \begin_inset space ~
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43276 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43282 \begin_layout Standard
43283 For example, assuming you use the menu
43285 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43288 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43292 \begin_layout Standard
43293 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43317 \begin_layout Standard
43319 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43334 to have the sixth bookmark.
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43346 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43347 's toolbar buttons.
43348 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43352 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43366 Enable tool tips in main work area
43368 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43376 \begin_layout Standard
43381 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43382 should display in the menu
43384 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_layout Subsection
43398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43402 \begin_layout Standard
43405 Restore window layouts and geometries
43408 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43409 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43416 Restore cursor positions
43418 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43422 \begin_layout Standard
43425 Load opened files from last session
43427 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43431 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Clear all session information
43436 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43437 sessions (cursor positions, names
43438 of last opened documents, etc.).
43441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43445 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43450 \begin_inset Index idx
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 \begin_layout Standard
43465 Backup original documents when saving
43467 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43468 it was saved the last time.
43469 It is stored in the
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43484 reference "sec:Paths"
43488 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43497 The backup file has the file extension
43498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43512 \begin_layout Standard
43515 Backup documents, every
43517 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43520 \begin_layout Standard
43523 Save documents compressed by default
43525 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43532 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43537 This applies to newly created documents only.
43538 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43541 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43542 Windows & work area
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43548 Open documents in tabs
43550 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43559 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43572 reference "sec:Paths"
43576 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43583 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43584 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43585 of \SpecialChar LyX
43587 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43588 instance is created for each file.
43591 \begin_layout Standard
43594 Single close-tab button
43596 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43606 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43607 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43609 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
43610 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
43616 \begin_layout Standard
43617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43625 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43626 before the change takes effect.
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43639 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43641 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43643 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43647 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43648 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43649 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43652 \begin_layout Subsection
43654 \begin_inset Index idx
43657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43666 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43673 \begin_layout Standard
43674 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43678 \begin_layout Standard
43679 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43687 This section only deals with the fonts
43691 the \SpecialChar LyX
43693 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43697 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43709 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43726 (depends on the system) as its
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_layout Standard
43746 You can change the font size with the
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43758 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43763 points have the size of 1
43764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43774 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43779 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43784 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43785 \begin_inset space ~
43789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43791 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43798 \begin_layout Standard
43801 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43803 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43804 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43805 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43806 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43807 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43809 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43816 \begin_layout Subsection
43818 \begin_inset Index idx
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43822 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43829 \begin_inset Index idx
43832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43841 \begin_layout Standard
43842 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43843 by choosing an item in the
43844 list and selecting the
43851 \begin_layout Standard
43852 By checking the option
43856 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43859 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43869 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43872 \begin_layout Subsection
43874 \begin_inset Index idx
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43887 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43896 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43897 This feature is described in section
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43904 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43911 \begin_layout Standard
43912 Checking the option
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43928 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43931 \begin_layout Section
43933 \begin_inset Index idx
43936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43945 \begin_layout Subsection
43949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43953 \begin_layout Standard
43956 Cursor follows scrollbar
43958 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43963 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43964 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43965 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43971 Scroll below end of document
43973 is self-explanatory.
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43977 In \SpecialChar LyX
43978 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43985 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43987 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43988 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43991 \begin_layout Standard
43994 Sort environments alphabetically
43996 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43999 \begin_layout Standard
44002 Group environments by their category
44004 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44007 \begin_layout Standard
44012 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44027 \begin_layout Standard
44028 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44033 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44034 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44038 \begin_layout Subsection
44040 \begin_inset Index idx
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44050 \begin_inset Index idx
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44054 Settings ! Shortcuts
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44067 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44069 Several binding files are available, among them:
44072 \begin_layout Description
44073 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44076 \begin_layout Description
44077 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44089 \begin_layout Description
44090 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44107 , and binding files for special languages.
44108 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44113 \begin_inset space \space{}
44117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44125 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44126 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44127 will try to use the appropriate binding
44131 \begin_layout Standard
44132 Some binding files, like
44136 , only have a limited scope.
44137 When looking at the end of the file
44141 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44144 \begin_layout Standard
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44157 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44158 in the selected key binding file.
44161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44165 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44170 \begin_inset Index idx
44173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44174 Key Bindings ! Editing
44182 \begin_layout Standard
44183 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44184 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44185 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44186 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44189 Show key-bindings containing
44192 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44193 Insert there for example as keyword
44194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44201 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44202 functions that contain
44203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44211 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44212 All \SpecialChar LyX
44213 functions are also listed in the file
44218 that you will find in the
44225 \begin_layout Standard
44226 For example, to add the shortcut
44234 , select the function and press the
44239 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44240 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44244 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44245 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44247 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44248 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44250 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44255 \begin_layout Standard
44256 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44259 \begin_layout Standard
44260 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44262 The syntax of the entries is:
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44290 \begin_layout Subsection
44292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44294 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44299 \begin_inset Index idx
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 \begin_inset Index idx
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44313 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44321 \begin_layout Standard
44322 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44323 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44324 provides keyboard maps.
44325 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44326 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44329 \begin_inset space ~
44333 \begin_inset space ~
44338 and select the keyboard map file named
44345 \begin_layout Standard
44354 keyboard map and, if you use the
44358 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44361 arg "keymap-primary"
44367 arg "keymap-secondary"
44370 respectively or toggle between them with
44373 arg "keymap-toggle"
44379 \begin_layout Standard
44380 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44388 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44397 \begin_layout Standard
44398 You can also specify the mouse
44400 Wheel scrolling speed
44403 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44407 Middle mouse button pasting
44409 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44410 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44413 \begin_layout Standard
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44430 you can select a key for zooming.
44431 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44434 \begin_layout Subsection
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 Input completion is described in section
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44446 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44453 \begin_layout Section
44455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44462 \begin_inset Index idx
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 \begin_inset Index idx
44475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44484 \begin_layout Standard
44485 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44486 are normally determined during
44488 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44491 \begin_layout Description
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44496 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44497 's working directory.
44498 It is the default when you
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44517 \begin_layout Description
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44522 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44524 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44538 \begin_layout Description
44540 \begin_inset space ~
44543 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44549 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44553 \begin_inset Newline newline
44557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44569 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44570 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44578 \begin_layout Description
44580 \begin_inset space ~
44584 \begin_inset Index idx
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44593 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44594 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44601 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44609 will be used to save the backups.
44610 \begin_inset Newline newline
44613 Backup files have the ending
44614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44624 \begin_layout Description
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44629 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44630 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44632 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44645 You can edit this file with the program
44654 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44655 in its preferences under
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44664 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44669 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44671 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44672 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44678 and \SpecialChar LyX
44679 need to be running the same time.
44680 \begin_inset Newline newline
44683 The pipe is also used for the
44687 feature, see section
44688 \begin_inset space ~
44692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44694 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44699 \begin_inset Newline newline
44702 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44703 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44704 \begin_inset Newline newline
44720 \begin_layout Description
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44725 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44728 \begin_layout Description
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44733 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44734 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44735 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44738 \begin_layout Description
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44743 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44749 You only need to specify it if you are using
44753 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44755 For \SpecialChar LyX
44760 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44764 \begin_layout Description
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44769 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44770 When \SpecialChar LyX
44771 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44772 to find it on the system.
44773 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44775 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44784 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44785 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44788 \begin_layout Description
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44793 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44794 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44795 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44796 code or in the document
44798 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44800 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44801 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44802 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44803 scanned for the input files.
44804 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44805 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44807 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44808 compilation may fail for some documents.
44811 \begin_layout Section
44815 \begin_layout Standard
44816 Here you can insert your
44825 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44827 \begin_inset space ~
44831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44833 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44837 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44840 \begin_layout Section
44842 \begin_inset Index idx
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 Language ! Settings
44852 \begin_inset Index idx
44855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44856 Settings ! Language
44864 \begin_layout Subsection
44866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44868 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44875 \begin_layout Description
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44884 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44886 You can find its actual translation status here:
44887 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44889 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44896 \begin_layout Description
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44901 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44902 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44903 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44904 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44921 The most widespread language package is
44926 \begin_inset Index idx
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44938 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44939 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44940 come with the alternative
44946 \begin_inset Index idx
44949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44951 -packages ! polyglossia
44956 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44957 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44963 The available selections are described in section
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44970 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44983 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44984 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44985 An example is the start command
44991 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44993 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44997 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45012 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45017 \begin_layout Description
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45027 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45028 command toggles the package on and off.
45031 \begin_layout Description
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45040 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45044 \begin_layout Description
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45053 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45057 \begin_layout Description
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45067 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45068 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45070 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45077 \begin_layout Description
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45082 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45084 When this option is not set, the
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45092 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45094 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_layout Description
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45119 When it is not set, the
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45127 is set to the end of the document.
45130 \begin_layout Description
45132 \begin_inset space ~
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45139 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45140 language will be underlined in blue.
45143 \begin_layout Description
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45149 \begin_inset space ~
45152 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45153 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45156 \begin_layout Description
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45161 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45162 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45163 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45164 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45167 \begin_layout Subsection
45171 \begin_layout Standard
45172 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45179 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45186 \begin_layout Section
45190 \begin_layout Subsection
45192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45194 name "subsec:General-output"
45201 \begin_layout Description
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45206 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45208 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45216 For a detailed description see section
45218 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45231 \begin_layout Description
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45236 Options Options for the program
45240 that is used for the export format
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45251 reference "subsec:Export"
45256 Possible options are listed in the
45261 \begin_inset Newline newline
45265 \begin_inset Flex URL
45268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45280 \begin_layout Description
45282 \begin_inset space ~
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45289 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45292 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45293 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45301 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45304 \begin_layout Description
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45310 \begin_inset Index idx
45313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 \begin_inset Index idx
45323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 Settings ! Date format
45329 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45330 \begin_inset Newline newline
45334 \begin_inset Flex URL
45337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45345 \begin_inset Newline newline
45348 For example the format
45349 \begin_inset Newline newline
45353 \begin_inset Newline newline
45356 prints the date as day/month/year.
45359 \begin_layout Description
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45368 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45369 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45372 \begin_layout Subsection
45378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45380 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45385 \begin_inset Index idx
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45398 \begin_layout Description
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45415 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45420 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45441 are used for Cyrillic.
45442 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45455 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45457 sets up in the background.
45458 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45461 \begin_layout Description
45463 \begin_inset space ~
45467 \begin_inset space ~
45471 \begin_inset space ~
45475 \begin_inset space ~
45478 options They only have an effect when the program
45482 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45485 \begin_layout Standard
45486 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45487 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45488 manuals of the applications.
45491 \begin_layout Description
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45496 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45503 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45510 \begin_layout Description
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45515 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45522 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45529 \begin_layout Description
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45534 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45541 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45548 \begin_layout Description
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45557 command Command for the program
45559 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45562 that is described in the section
45564 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45569 Additional Features
45574 \begin_layout Standard
45575 There are additionally the following options:
45578 \begin_layout Description
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45588 \begin_inset space ~
45592 \begin_inset space ~
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45600 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45618 to separate folders.
45619 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45621 \begin_inset Index idx
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 \begin_inset Index idx
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 \begin_layout Description
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45657 \begin_inset space ~
45661 \begin_inset space ~
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45668 changes Removes all manually set
45674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45682 dialog when changing the document class.
45685 \begin_layout Section
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45691 \begin_inset Index idx
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 \begin_layout Subsection
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45707 name "subsec:Converters"
45712 \begin_inset Index idx
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 \begin_layout Standard
45725 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45726 from one format to another.
45727 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45728 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45735 \begin_inset space ~
45740 field and press the
45745 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45749 \begin_inset space ~
45754 drop-down list, modify the
45758 field and press the
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45768 Converter File Cache
45774 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45776 Maximum Age (in days
45779 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45780 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45784 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45785 definition, is described in the section
45796 \begin_layout Subsection
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45800 name "sec:File-Formats"
45805 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 \begin_inset Index idx
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45827 \begin_layout Standard
45828 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45838 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45841 \begin_layout Standard
45842 You can also define the
45844 Default output format
45846 that is used when you use
45848 View, Update, View Master Document
45852 Update Master Document
45858 menu or the toolbar.
45861 \begin_layout Standard
45862 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45873 \begin_layout Standard
45874 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45876 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45877 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45878 This is done by specifying a
45883 More about this is described in the section
45894 \begin_layout Chapter
45895 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45897 \begin_inset Index idx
45900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45909 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45916 \begin_layout Standard
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45924 reference "tab:Units"
45928 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45929 and used in this documentation.
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 \begin_inset Float table
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45940 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45958 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 \begin_inset Tabular
45967 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45968 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45969 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45970 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46177 scaled point (65536
46178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46256 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46329 % of original image width
46334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46645 \begin_layout Chapter
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46649 name "chap:Credits"
46656 \begin_layout Standard
46657 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46658 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46661 \begin_layout Itemize
46664 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46667 \begin_layout Itemize
46673 \begin_layout Itemize
46679 \begin_layout Itemize
46685 \begin_layout Itemize
46691 \begin_layout Itemize
46697 \begin_layout Itemize
46703 \begin_layout Itemize
46709 \begin_layout Itemize
46712 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46715 \begin_layout Itemize
46721 \begin_layout Itemize
46727 \begin_layout Itemize
46733 \begin_layout Itemize
46739 \begin_layout Itemize
46745 \begin_layout Itemize
46751 \begin_layout Itemize
46757 \begin_layout Itemize
46763 \begin_layout Itemize
46764 The \SpecialChar LyX
46766 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46775 \begin_layout Standard
46776 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46779 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46786 \begin_layout Bibliography
46787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46788 LatexCommand bibitem
46794 The \SpecialChar LyX
46796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46799 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46804 \begin_inset Newline newline
46808 \begin_inset Flex URL
46811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46813 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46821 \begin_layout Bibliography
46822 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46823 LatexCommand bibitem
46824 key "latexcompanion"
46828 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46830 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46831 Companion Second Edition.
46834 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46837 \begin_layout Bibliography
46838 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46839 LatexCommand bibitem
46844 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46847 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46851 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46854 \begin_layout Bibliography
46855 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46856 LatexCommand bibitem
46864 : A Document Preparation System.
46867 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46870 \begin_layout Bibliography
46871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46872 LatexCommand bibitem
46881 The \SpecialChar TeX
46885 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46888 \begin_layout Bibliography
46889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46890 LatexCommand bibitem
46895 The \SpecialChar TeX
46897 \begin_inset Newline newline
46901 \begin_inset Flex URL
46904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46906 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46914 \begin_layout Bibliography
46915 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46916 LatexCommand bibitem
46921 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46923 \begin_inset Newline newline
46927 \begin_inset Flex URL
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46932 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46940 \begin_layout Bibliography
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46942 LatexCommand bibitem
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46950 name "Documentation"
46951 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46957 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46961 \begin_inset Newline newline
46965 \begin_inset Flex URL
46968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46970 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46978 \begin_layout Bibliography
46979 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46980 LatexCommand bibitem
46986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46988 name "Documentation"
46989 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46993 how to use the program
46995 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46999 \begin_inset Newline newline
47003 \begin_inset Flex URL
47006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47008 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47016 \begin_layout Bibliography
47017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47018 LatexCommand bibitem
47024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47026 name "Documentation"
47027 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47036 \begin_inset Newline newline
47040 \begin_inset Flex URL
47043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47045 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47053 \begin_layout Bibliography
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47055 LatexCommand bibitem
47056 key "makeindex-man"
47061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47064 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47073 \begin_inset Newline newline
47077 \begin_inset Flex URL
47080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47082 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47090 \begin_layout Bibliography
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47092 LatexCommand bibitem
47098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47100 name "Documentation"
47101 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47110 \begin_inset Newline newline
47114 \begin_inset Flex URL
47117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47119 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47127 \begin_layout Bibliography
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47129 LatexCommand bibitem
47135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47137 name "Documentation"
47138 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47142 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47144 \begin_inset Newline newline
47148 \begin_inset Flex URL
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47153 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47161 \begin_layout Bibliography
47162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47163 LatexCommand bibitem
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47171 name "Documentation"
47172 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47176 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47182 \begin_inset Index idx
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47187 -packages ! caption
47193 \begin_inset Newline newline
47197 \begin_inset Flex URL
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47210 \begin_layout Bibliography
47211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47212 LatexCommand bibitem
47218 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47220 name "Documentation"
47221 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47225 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47231 \begin_inset Index idx
47234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47236 -packages ! enumitem
47242 \begin_inset Newline newline
47246 \begin_inset Flex URL
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47251 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47259 \begin_layout Bibliography
47260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47261 LatexCommand bibitem
47267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47269 name "Documentation"
47270 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47274 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47280 \begin_inset Index idx
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 -packages ! fancyhdr
47291 \begin_inset Newline newline
47295 \begin_inset Flex URL
47298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47308 \begin_layout Bibliography
47309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47310 LatexCommand bibitem
47316 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47318 name "Documentation"
47319 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47323 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47329 \begin_inset Index idx
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47334 -packages ! hyperref
47340 \begin_inset Newline newline
47344 \begin_inset Flex URL
47347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47349 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47357 \begin_layout Bibliography
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47359 LatexCommand bibitem
47365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47367 name "Documentation"
47368 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47372 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47378 \begin_inset Index idx
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 -packages ! nomencl
47389 \begin_inset Newline newline
47393 \begin_inset Flex URL
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47398 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47406 \begin_layout Bibliography
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47408 LatexCommand bibitem
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47416 name "Documentation"
47417 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47421 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47427 \begin_inset Index idx
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 -packages ! prettyref
47438 \begin_inset Newline newline
47442 \begin_inset Flex URL
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47447 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47455 \begin_layout Bibliography
47456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47457 LatexCommand bibitem
47463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47465 name "Documentation"
47466 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47470 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47476 \begin_inset Index idx
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 -packages ! refstyle
47487 \begin_inset Newline newline
47491 \begin_inset Flex URL
47494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47504 \begin_layout Bibliography
47505 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47506 LatexCommand bibitem
47512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47515 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47519 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47521 \begin_inset Newline newline
47525 \begin_inset Flex URL
47528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47530 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47538 \begin_layout Bibliography
47539 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47540 LatexCommand bibitem
47546 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47549 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47553 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47555 \begin_inset Newline newline
47559 \begin_inset Flex URL
47562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47564 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47572 \begin_layout Bibliography
47573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47574 LatexCommand bibitem
47580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47583 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47587 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47588 for Cyrillic languages:
47589 \begin_inset Newline newline
47593 \begin_inset Flex URL
47596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47598 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47606 \begin_layout Bibliography
47607 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47608 LatexCommand bibitem
47614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47617 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47621 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47623 \begin_inset Newline newline
47627 \begin_inset Flex URL
47630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47632 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47640 \begin_layout Bibliography
47641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47642 LatexCommand bibitem
47648 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47651 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47655 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47657 \begin_inset Newline newline
47661 \begin_inset Flex URL
47664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47666 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47674 \begin_layout Bibliography
47675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47676 LatexCommand bibitem
47682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47685 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47689 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47691 \begin_inset Newline newline
47695 \begin_inset Flex URL
47698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47700 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47708 \begin_layout Bibliography
47709 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47710 LatexCommand bibitem
47716 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47719 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47723 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47725 \begin_inset Newline newline
47729 \begin_inset Flex URL
47732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47734 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47742 \begin_layout Bibliography
47743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47744 LatexCommand bibitem
47750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47753 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47757 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47759 \begin_inset Newline newline
47763 \begin_inset Flex URL
47766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47768 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47776 \begin_layout Bibliography
47777 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47778 LatexCommand bibitem
47784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47787 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47791 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47793 \begin_inset Newline newline
47797 \begin_inset Flex URL
47800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47802 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47810 \begin_layout Bibliography
47811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47812 LatexCommand bibitem
47818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47821 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47825 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47827 \begin_inset Newline newline
47831 \begin_inset Flex URL
47834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47836 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47844 \begin_layout Bibliography
47845 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47846 LatexCommand bibitem
47852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47855 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47859 about new features in
47865 \begin_inset Newline newline
47869 \begin_inset Flex URL
47872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47882 \begin_layout Standard
47883 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47917 \begin_inset Note Note
47920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47927 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47928 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47929 bibliography is the second one:
47937 \begin_layout Standard
47938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47939 LatexCommand bibtex
47940 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47941 options "biblio/alphadin"
47948 \begin_layout Standard
47949 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47953 \begin_layout Standard
47954 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47955 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47961 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47962 LatexCommand printindex